Home

Viper SC+™ Intelligent IP Router for Licensed Spectrum User Manual

1. esses nnne enne nnns nnns 188 PLC Ladder Logic On Restart Opens All Connections At Once Instead Of Sequentially eeesss 188 Allen Bradley CompactLogix and ControlLogix Series PLCs Ethernet IP Connection Timeout Setting Timeout Too Short Car Cause Problems ouis asor ads toa dais qu i e Esta ta ed a fe otus etta ess a usu eK eap CI ome ES DUE OU em UA EID 188 Overriding the Default Inactivity Timeout Not Recommended Unless Required ccsccccsssececessececeseceeeeeeees 189 Summary On TCP Connection Timeout Inactivity Setting nennen nnne nennen nnns 190 Allen Bradley CompactLogix or ControlLogix Series PLCs Sends Too Many CIP Forward Open and CIP Forward Close e H 190 Connected or Unconnected operation description for CIP cccccccccsssseccccceeseccceceesecceceseseccesseeneceesseaeeeeessueeeeeeees 190 When Communication Is Between ControlLogix or CompactLogix And Other Logix Series PLCs 191 When Communication Is Between ControlLogix or CompactLogix and other Logix Series PLCs 192 Summary of Connected or Unconnected Operation ccccccccsssscccccsesseccccaesecccsaesececsaeaeecessseaseceesuaeseeessaeaeeeeesages 193 Allen Bradley CompactLogix or ControlLogix series PLCs Send Many TCP IP Keep Alive Messages ee 193 APPENDIXJ Servic
2. Packet statistics in the RF section are presented in two columns as explained below OIP Sublayer Packets Statistics listed in the left column are for Optimized IP OIP sublayer packets Rx Total number of incoming packets received by the RF OIP interface Tx Total number of outgoing packets transmitted by the RF OIP interface Airlink Sublayer Packets Statistics listed in the right column are for physical radio frequency connection Airlink sublayer packets RxCtrl Total number of control packets received over the air These packets may be RTS CTS messages or RF Acknowledgements RxData Total number of data packets transmitted over the air TxCtrl Total number of control packets transmitted over the air These packets may be RTS CTS messages or RF Acknowledgements TxData Total number of output data packets transmitted over the air Airlink error detection statistics provide information about the quality of the RF link Reliable Service Message Success Count Total number of service messages that succeeded RF Acknowledgements must be enabled in order to generate a Reliable Service Message Reliable Service Msg Failure Count Total number of service messages that failed Total Retry Count Total number of retries for service messages Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 115 Noise Detected Count Number of noise non Viper carrier detected ab
3. Note If you change the Port VLAN ID PVID for either serial port a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 98 4 6 2 1 ADVANCED SETTINGS FOR SERIAL VLAN Advanced Settings are available for both Serial ports both the Setup and COM port Advanced settings for VLAN configuration for both serial ports Setup and COM are on the same single tab Figure 59 Serial VLAN tab Advanced Settings only Advanced Settings Show Hide Silently Keep Retag Tag Delete Drop Packet Packet Packet Tag Packet Unchanged With PVID With PMID Ingress Packet Untagged O VID 0 VID PVID VID PVID Egress Packet Untagged Q VID 0 e O VID PVID VID I PVID I l I Advanced Settings Show Hide Retag Packet With PWID Tag Packet With PVID Silently Drop Packet Keep Packet Unchanged Ingress Packet Untagged e VID 0 VID PVID VID PVID Egress Packet Untagged VID 0 VID PVID VID I PVID eo e O Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked PN you wil need to reset the unit for them to take effect Untagged Port Advanced Settings provide options for ingress packets packets coming into the Viper and egress packets packets leaving the Viper Selections in this section allow you to specify what actions are to be taken with ingres
4. Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 16 Ethernet Subnet Mask Varies from Viper to Viper RF Subnet Mask is the same for all units 255 0 0 0 hence 8 shown for all RF IP Addresses 8 ones 24 zeros binary HMI PLC RTU Default Gateway points to the Viper that the HMI PLC RTU is connected to Viper 1 Ethernet IP Address 192 168 205 1 24 RF IP Address 10 11 12 25 8 PLC 1 192 168 205 2 24 Default Gateway 192 168 205 1 Computer HMI 1 192 168 205 3 24 Default Gateway 192 168 205 1 Viper 2 Ethernet IP Address 192 168 206 1 24 RF IP Address 10 9 7 251 8 PLC 2 192 168 206 2 24 Default Gateway 192 168 206 1 Viper 3 Ethernet IP Address 192 168 207 1 24 RF IP Address 10 8 0 52 8 PLC 3 192 168 207 2 24 Default Gateway 192 168 207 1 Computer 3 192 168 207 3 24 Default Gateway 192 168 207 1 Viper 4 Ethernet IP Address 172 21 51 105 16 RF IP Address 10 0 1 11 8 PLC H4 172 21 51 106 16 Default Gateway 172 21 51 106 Figure 9 Router Mode Example 1 LO 192 168 206 2 PLC 3 192 168 207 2 Viper 2 B Ethernet IP 192 168 206 1 RF IP 10 9 7 251 PLC 192 168 205 2 HMlI Computer 200 1172 21 51 200 S Viper 1 Viper 3 Ethernet IP 192 168 207 1 RF IP 10 8 0 52 i c PLC 100 Ethernet IP 192 168 205 1 FREE 172 21 51 100 RF IP 10 11 12 25 HMI Viper 240 192 188 205 3 Ethernet IP 172 21 51 240 RF IP 10 0 1 11 Ethernet Subnet Mask Varies from Viper to
5. Interface Statistics Diagnostics SNMP AGENT Enabled SH amp Disabled Local IP Address Automatic Read Community III Read Write Community d eee0006 Trap Community d eeeee88 irm a b c d C Delete Trap IP List Empty MIB Download mibs zip Forward Power Enabled Disabled Reverse Power Enabled 9 Disabled PA Power Enabled Disabled Save Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked fb you wil need to reset the unit for them to take effect SNMP Agent Enable or disable the internal SNMP agent by selecting the appropriate option The default setting is Disabled Local IP Address The Viper can be programmed to respond to SNMP queries to its local IP Address RF or Ethernet IP address Automatic or respond to its Ethernet IP address Ethernet or respond to its RF IP Address RF Select either Automatic Ethernet or RF The default setting is Automatic Read Community The password string entered in the Read Community field grants read only access to external MIB browsers Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 118 Read Write Community The password string entered in the Read Write Community field grants read write access to external MIB browsers Trap Community The password string entered in the Trap Community field is included in SNMP trap packets Trap IP List This list shows the user programmed IP addresses where the Viper will send SNMP t
6. POWER SAVE MODE Viper has offered a Power Save Mode PSM since the release of version 3 4 firmware The normal power consumption is as follows Table 18 Normal Power Consumption for Viper SC Rx Current Drain at 25 C DC Input 10V DCInput20V DC Input 30 V Maximum 690 mA 345 mA 260 mA Typical 600 mA 300 mA 225 mA Tx Current Drain at 25 C DC Input 10V DCinput20V DC Input 30 V Maximum Power Out Maximum 6 0 A 2 7 A 1 8 A a sea aoa O aaa 30 dBm 1 W Out Maximum 1 8 A 1 0 A 0 8 A eens ima aaa osa osa Using a 20 V DC input as an example typical Rx current drain is 240 mA Power consumption at this level is 4 8 W With the PSM enabled power consumption will drop to less than 2 W providing a power saving of greater than 40 PSM allows for much faster startup wake up time Normally wake up time is approximately 30 seconds from a cold start power off With PSM wake up time is between two to five seconds 2 5 sec for full operation The following functions are turned off during PSM Transmit and Receive the radio will not receive nor transmit a message while in PSM Communication ports are inactive the Ethernet and serial ports are not functioning during PSM PSM is enabled by programming the Power Management feature of the Viper SC in the Basic Settings tab of the Home page by setting the Auto Reset option to Enabled Follow Ignition Sense as shown in the following figure Figure 81 Enable
7. The following figure illustrates a VPN network with one Viper programmed as a VPN server and three remotes set as VPN clients In this example a secure connection is established between all Viper remotes and the Access Point Only a Viper configured as an Access Point can operate as a VPN server Figure 65 Viper VPN Network Viper 2 VPN Client x Viper 3 Private j Backhaul VPN Client Network Viper 1 Access Point amp VPN Servier Viper 4 VPN Client This example can be further extended to include a relay point which allows one unit to relay data from one RF coverage area to another RF coverage area as shwon in the following figure Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 106 Figure 66 Viper VPN Network with Relay Point Viper 2 VPN Client N Vip r 3 Viper 5 Private VPN Clienf amp Relay Point VPN Client Network Access Point amp VPN Servier Viper 4 VPN Client A VPN tunnel is created by a client to a specific server A server can have tunnels to many clients A special shared tunnel is also provided to support a few special traffic types e Point to multipoint broadcast and multicast packets e Telnet Web SNMP and RADIUS packets e Device specific IP service packets GPS RSSI diagnostics etc The shared tunnel is always available on a device provided that its VPN service is enabled Tunnel Maintenance Key exchange Random cipher keys
8. VIPER SC INTELLIGENT IP ROUTERS FOR LICENSED SPECTRUM C Am p connecting tomorrow today User Manual Viper SC Intelligent IP Routers for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Revised December 2013 REVISION HISTORY REV DATE REVISION DETAILS 0 January 2008 Initial release as 001 5008 000 1 May 2008 Update dual port Viper SC information 2 September 2008 Added information about SNMP Updated firmware upgrade instructions December 2008 Added information about TCP client server module Added information about saving and restoring user configuration files 3 4 April 2009 Added information about V1 5 Viper SC code release Added information about TCP proxy feature Added note to RF acknowledgement section Corrected Viper SC power cable part in accessory table Added specifications and part number for 900 MHz Viper SC Updated RF exposure compliance requirements Added choosing an IP addressing scheme July 2009 Added information about V1 5 Viper SC code release Added information about Listen Before Transmit Disable feature Added section about RF MAC override feature Added section about the Periodic Reset feature Added screen capture and information for the Add Static Entry function 6 September 2009 Added Listen Before Transmit Disable Feature Previously read Added Listen Before Talk Disable Feature 7 November 2009 Updated user manual for product name change from ViPR to Viper SC June 2010 Added UL
9. With future releases of PLC software and firmware the described operation could change It is always recommended to be informed on PLC release changes from your PLC provider or manufacturer or Allen Bradley or Rockwell Automation support ALLEN BRADLEY COMPACTLOGIX OR CONTROLLOGIX SERIES PLCS SEND MANY TCP IP KEEP ALIVE MESSAGES The CompactLogix and ControlLogix series PLCs send TCP IP keep alive messages every 8 seconds in both directions for each TCP connection When several PLCs do the same it is possible that a good part of the on air bandwidth is used up by the keep alive traffic We recommend that the Viper be configured in router mode and that the TCP Proxy is enabled The Viper TCP Proxy feature will filter out the TCP IP keep alive messages The PLCs TCP keep alive cannot be disabled nor adjusted It has been recommended to Allen Bradley and Rockwell Automation to have an option in the PLC settings to disable keep alive and have user selectable keep alive intervals This could potentially become available in future releases of PLC firmware Also please refer to Viper General Setup With PLCs earlier in this appendix Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 193 APPENDIX J SERVICE AND SUPPORT AND WARRANTY STATEMENT Product Warranty RMA and Contact Information CalAmp guarantees that every Viper SC IP router will be free from physical defects in material and workmanship for one 1 year
10. 192 168 206 1 39 53 8 8 11 8 8 d s272 00 80 08 0901 1 11 5 8x01 192 168 206 1 192 168 205 1 39 49 8 8 11 8 8 00 80 00 0901 1 11 5 0x21 192 168 205 1 192 168 206 1 39 53 8 8 11 8 8 MAC address of the station where diagnostic measurements are being collected The host will collect diagnostic messages from itself and all remote units with IPSD enabled IPSD can be enabled or disabled in the Advanced Setup options for the port settings Version of the online diagnostics Different versions may have different parameters This table describes Version 1 Bo Number of items that follow in the online diagnostic message Period PERIOD seconds Specifies the time between generation of online diagnostic messages from the source station Online Diagnostics Flags CalAmp specific Source Source Address In Bridge mode this address displays the MAC address of the source Viper In Router mode this address displays the IP address of the of the source Viper station generating the diagnostic message This is also the source station from the point of view of the RSSI measurements Destination Destination Address In Bridge mode this address displays the MAC address of the destination Viper In Router mode this address displays the IP address of the destination Viper This is the destination station from the point of view of RSSI measurements Temperature of the source Viper in Celsius or Fahrenheit Temp
11. 9 Disabled Server Address 0 0 0 0 Period SNTP UTC Time 0 TimeZone GMT 6 00 Central Time Daylight Saving Enabled Disabled Local Time 2013 11 07 10 05 02 Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked i you wil need to reset the unit for them to take effect Client The SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol Client can be enabled or disabled The default setting is disabled Server Address When the SNTP client is enabled enter the IP address of an SNTP Server Period Enter the amount of time in seconds between that will elapse between each time the SNTP server will be polled to obtain the current time The default setting is 64 seconds 1 minute 4 seconds between polling SNTP UTC Time Display the time received from the SNTP Server in seconds when it was most recently polled This field is read only and non zero only when SNTP client is enabled and an SNTP server has been polled Time Zone Allows you to select the time zone applicable for the location of the Viper Facilitates translation of UTC time to local time Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 76 Daylight Saving Allows you to specify whether Daylight Saving time is in effect for the locale and time of year where the Viper is located Local Time Displays the local date and time to seconds when the SNTP client is enabled an SNTP server has been polled and settings for time zone and daylig
12. As a last step DeviceOutlook verifies that all Vipers have successfully applied the firmware upgrade Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 126 Figure 77 Device Maintenance Wing Commander Device Maintenance Config Control Package Control Wing Commander WCP Login WCP Password Pe set Password Data Key Strength 256 Set Strength Data Key Set Key Multicast Group 239 192 0 1 Local Port4 7010 Forward WC Traffic to RF network E A amp Enabled Disabled 0 0 0 1 162030 zip 1553477 1470 100 N A If you Save changes te any parameters marked fy you will need te reset the unit for them to take effect Most of the WCP settings intrusive or transparent packet pacing addressing options retries etc are controlled from the server leaving only a few settings to be specified on the Viper The user must set the WCP security configuration because all WCP communication is encrypted WCP Login Log in using the WCP password before proceeding with the WCP security configuration Enter the WCP Login in the field provided and click Login WCP Password To set a new password enter the new password and click Set Passowrd The password must contain at least three of the following An uppercase alpha character A Z A lowercase alpha character a z Anumeric character 0 9 Any other printable character for example S Password length must
13. But here are instructions how it would be done if required It is possible to override the Message Configuration default inactivity timeout by adding to the path for example LocalENB 2 192 1 9 inactivity 100 1 0 Using inactivity 100 would set the inactivity timeout to 100 seconds instead of the default 120 seconds Note Setting of inactivity x where x can be between 1 and 120 seconds Using x 120 seconds will disable the message completely Figure 101 Setting Example Using Custom Inactivity Timeout 100 seconds Message Configuration MS5G1 Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Data Table Read w Source Element Number OF Elements Message Configuration MSG1 Destination Element Mative Logis Tac Configuration Communication Tag LocalENB 2 192 168 1 9 inactity 100 1 0 Broadcast Overriding the default inactivity timeout is normally not required and can cause additional undesired side effects One of these side effects would be when the inactivity timeout is less than the longest delay between two messages additional IP messages are sent for each close and reopen of the TCP connection This adds a lot of on air traffic and negatively impacts the system performance Note When using different inactivity timeout values for messages with the same TCP connection When different messages for the same remote share the same TCP connection each different message s inactivity timeout
14. Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab See Note below Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 84 Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note If you change the PHY Bitrate or PHY Duplex setting in this tab as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect 4 5 ROUTER The Router page contains three tabs Routing Table NAT and VTS 4 5 1 ROUTING TABLE Routing Table is the first left most tab in the Router page To navigate to this tab select RF Network Settings from the main menu and click Routing Table The Viper supports RIPV2 Routing Information Protocol version 2 This tab allows you to enable or disable RIPv2 view the routing table and connection type and add or delete routing entries Figure 52 Router Routing Table Router Routing Table NAT VTS RmiPV2 O Enabled Disabled Cancel Routing Table 0000000000000 ur 1 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 1 1 1 1 Maintenance 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 1 1 1 1 Maintenance 10 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 10 0 1 2 Connected 10 0 1 2 255 255 255 255 10 0 1 2 Connected 192 168 205 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 205 1 Connected 192 168 205 1 255 255 255 255 192 168 205 1 Connected A Add Delete i E you Add or Delete routes you must follow by Reset Unit for the changes to take effect RIPv2 RIPv2 R
15. Ease of Access Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 30 sah and gs tet preferences for ub f fies and corputert confiau N Vien devices and printer Pet pute jure Internet displey and connection and Adda dence z mor User Accounts and Family Satety LECT ot remove user accounts L4 set up parental contro for arty user Appearance and Personalization hange the theme Lange desktop background wit screen resolution ck Language and Region nge keyboards of other input methods of Access Viindows suggest settings rd Optimize v sual dapley Network and Sharing Center View network status and tasks Cor Add a wireless device to the network HomeGroup Choose homegroup and sharing opti Internet Options Change yourhomepage Manage 4 Click Change Adapter Settings 5 Double click Local Area Connection 6 Click the Properties button e 2 SF Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center s B Seorch ontrol Panel Home A n ets View your basic network information and set up conne Click Change Manage wireless networks Adapter scr T Settings USER PC N Only Change advanced sharing This computer ne View your active networks N Only Access type aime Connections 4 Change your networking settings b Set up new connection or network c Set up a wireless broadband dial up ad hoc or VPN connect point C
16. Page iii 2 4 CPerramandsignal Strengths doe stu ee uei Hall MEL LM al ln Daeg ICI LM e M teak at 27 2 9 JRadioInte erell6B usc eed domi t tu bntat v uei dm Cel oec utei LIUM oman 27 3 Getting Started Quick Setup and Initial Configuration seeeseeeeneneens 28 3S d stdib tee ADEtelllid usitatum Moe intente Dieib sexum er sense tired O UE ed uue eeu erede Ma v 28 2 2 Measure Primal Vo POWOL estet ex TE Ephes ur eoa E o Ov dad URP Ent ab Cv du n ud uPs Vasca rd P Aa E n ui 28 3 23 Conect TNE Viper SCH fo ProOBFammlilng PC assieme RE Pe e IR TeL o tercios ad Ioue A 28 24 WAIN ConfigutatiOlioessenss tese aim E Pob a tepRU Ru VOS ance daasa au ae tetti n Me eU Co n PEU L QI DEUM LSU UU Ore eE 29 o Soc PEE CN 32 3 6 Jntrod ction tothe Viper SC Web Interfaces icit es rto vieni ee ERE uet Coda acie ena eo EU et dr veuve ea o e Lebe er eo bn EE ree Eus 33 3 7 Initial Configuration Using the Setup Wizard eeeesssssseeeeeseeennn nennen enne annees sane nna nns 34 3 7 1 Setup Wizard Step 1 Station Name and Mode Settings ccccssccccsseecccesecceceeseeseeeccessusecseeueeesaueeeeseases 35 3 7 2 Setup Wizard Step 2 NetWork IP Setting Sameria E aote E E EN E E ERES 36 3 7 3 Setup Wizard Step 3 RadlO SETUD usi sete A EEA S EE A RU ved d EAA QU Qe EE MEER 37 3 7 4 Setup Wizard Step A Encryption cosas EAT ooa io EL Ur bi dete S ERO E ru pde o ERE lusu EQ Id pu PIENE I vpU IN S 38 Su 5 Setup Wizard Step
17. Use the following DNS server addressec 5 Click OK to apply your changes You may Sl Altemate ONS server need to reboot your computer to complete this process or right click the network connection icon in the system tray that corresponds to the Ethernet connection and click Repair Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 29 For Microsoft Windows 7 do the following 1 From the PC select the Windows Start button Control Panel 2 Click Network and Internet 3 Click Network and Sharing Center Click Start and Internet Click Control Panel gt All Programs Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Help and Support Run Shut down se Adjust your computer s settings System and Security Review your computer s status Back up your computer Click Network View network status and act l a Network and Internet e Choose homegroup and let heck network Hardware and Sou en onnect to projector used mobdrty settings ommonly Adjust Programs Ke Unimitall a program gt a OGOF gt Panel Network and Internet gt File Edit View Tools Help Click Network and Sharing antral Danal ama T9 Center lt A m System and Security e Network and Internet Hardware and Sound Programs User Accounts and Family Q Safety Appearance and Personalization Clock Language and Region
18. When QoS is disabled only the hidden control transmit queue is operational packets are transmitted over the RF interface first come first served Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 69 Default LAN Queue Allows you to select one of the configured LAN Queues as the default queue A packet coming from the Ethernet interface that must be sent over the RF interface will be placed into the default transmit queue unless a specific filter is defined that indicates which RF transmit queue to use Enable or Disable Place a check mark in the check box to enable a queue Clear the check box to disable the queue At least one LAN port queue must be enabled at all times Rate The minimum guaranteed bit rate expressed as a percentage of the available bandwidth Minimum value is 0 Maximum value is 100 A value of 0 means discard any packets sent to this queue Ceiling The maximum bit rate expressed as a percentage of the available bandwidth Minimum value is 1 Maximum value is 100 Queue Size packets The maximum amount of packets the transmit queue can hold Minimum value is 1 packet Maximum value is 128 packets High Priority When sending packets the packet scheduler sends a packet from one transmit queue moves to the next transmit queue and sends one packet then moves to the next transmit queue etc All this is done while maintaining the configured throughputs per transmit q
19. While connection is established with the same remote IP and same port in this example 192 168 1 9 other messages will use the same TCP connection and therefore resetting the timeout count for each message sent When all messages are using the same default inactivity time 120 seconds the TCP connection stays open as long as the next message is sent within the inactivity timeout period The TCP connection is closed after the last message plus the inactivity period default 120 seconds The TCP connection can also be terminated based on network connection problems The message configuration for this example will look similar to the following figure Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 188 Figure 100 Message Configuration Configuration and Communication tabs in PLC setup utility Message Configuration MSG1 Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Data Table Read v Source Element Any Logs Tag Number Of Elements 1 Message Configuration MSG1 Destination Element Native Logix Tac Configuration Communication Tag S Path EENAA LocalENB 2 132 168 1 3 1 0 Overriding the Default Inactivity Timeout Not Recommended Unless Required Overriding the default inactivity timeout for the TCP connection in the Message Configuration is not recommended unless it is required
20. del Deutsch German Hiermit erkl rt CalAmp dass sich das Ger t radio in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet K esolevaga kinnitab CalAmp seadme raadio vastavust direktiivi 1999 5 EU pohinduetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele s tetele en English Hereby CalAmp declares that this radio is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Espa ol Spanish Por medio de la presente CalAmp declara que el radio cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE OYXIOAEIX ANAITHZEI2 KAI TIX AOINE ZXETIKEZ AIATA EIZ TH OAHTIA 1999 5 EK Par la pr sente CalAmp d clare que l appareil radio est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Con la presente CalAmp dichiara che questo radio conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Latvian Ar o CalAmp deklar ka radio atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem It Lietuviy Lithuanian iuo CalAmp deklaruoja kad is radijo atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB Direktyvos nuostatas Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Re
21. is 2 More Info Clicking More Info displays the above information TCP Proxy The TCP Proxy setting is available only when the Viper is configured in Router Mode The default setting is Disabled The TCP proxy optimizes the throughput of a TCP connection by removing some of the TCP packets from the airlink A Viper receiving a TCP packet over the air sends an RF acknowledgement to the sending unit If the sending Viper receives the RF acknowledgement it knows the packet made it across the airlink successfully When the TCP proxy is enabled and the TCP packet contained data the sending Viper immediately generates a TCP ACK to the sending host RTU PLC PC etc When the destination host receives the TCP packet it generates a TCP ACK back to the source This TCP ACK is captured by the Viper and is not sent over the airlink 1 TCP Packet over 2 TCP Packet over 3 TCP Packet over Ethernet Airlink Ethernet Viper A Viper B TCP Proxy Enabled TCP Proxy Enabled Figure 34 TCP Proxy lt E ILLE P 1B LL L 4 When Viper A 3 RF ACK over 4 Host B generates hears RF ACK it Airlink TCP ACK generates a TCP ACK 5 TCP ACK is not and sends it back to transmitted Host A In this example the following events occur in this order 1 HostA sends a TCP data packet to Viper A 2 Viper A transmits the packet over the air to Viper B 3 Viper B immediately responds with an RF acknowledgement and sends the
22. 000 Rev A Page 97 4 6 2 VLAN VLAN is the third from left second from right tab in the Serial page To navigate to this tab select Serial from the main menu and click VLAN This tab contains configuration for VLAN set up through either or both of the serial ports COM or Setup VLAN configuration settings for both serial ports Setup and COM are on this single tab Figure 58 Serial VLAN Com Port Setup Port VLAN Advanced Mode Untagged Port VLAN IDA PVID 1 4094 Advanced Settings Show 9 Hide Mode Untagged Port VLAN ID PVID 14094 Advanced Settings Show 9 Hide Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked fy you will need te reset the unit for them te take effect Mode Both serial interfaces Setup and COM operate in VLAN Untagged mode only In Untagged mode devices on this interface are not using VLAN tags Incoming ingress packets are tagged with the port VLAN ID PVID VLAN tags are removed on outgoing egress packets See the Advanced Settings For Serial VLAN section that follows for more options Port VLAN ID Sets the Port VLAN ID PVID Advanced Settings Show or Hide Click Show to show advanced settings in the lower part of the tab click Hide to hide the advanced settings Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab
23. 1 3 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION Viper consists of two logic PCBs one that includes the modem circuitry and the other the radio module Both are installed in a cast aluminum case The unit is not hermetically sealed and should be mounted in a suitable enclosure when dust moisture and or a corrosive atmosphere are anticipated 1 3 1 CHASSIS DIMENSIONS The following figure shows the dimensions of the Viper chassis and attached mounting plate 6 50 in Figure 1 Viper SC Chassis and Mounting Plate Overall Dimensions and Mounting Hole Locations 5 75 in it AME f i i i i i i VIT l ii i i i z 4 74 in 0 75 in 2 75 in 1 75 in Q 0 210 in x 4 mounting holes The equipment is intended for installation only in a RESTRICTED ACCESS LOCATION per EN60950 1 2006 1 3 2 LED PANEL There are five 5 Tri Color LEDs in the LED panel of the Viper as shown in the following figure Their functionality is described in the following table Figure 2 Viper LED panel Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 2 Table 1 LED Functionality Color Definition LED POWER Green Solid Viper SC ready normal operations Green Blinking Upgrade in progress Red Viper SC hardware fault STATUS Green Viper SC no faults normal operations Blinking Green Viper SC scanning for neighbors Red Viper SC has a fault condition check unit status Amber Solid or Blinking Vi
24. 2 CWID CWID is the second middle tab of the Radio Settings page To navigate to this tab select Radio Settings from the main menu and click CWID In this tab you can configure the Viper CWID parameters Some regulatory agencies require a station identification The Viper offers a Morse Code CW identifier or Continuous Wave Identification CWID that will identify the unit on the first transmission and at periodic intervals after that This tab is used to enable this feature if required and enter the CWID call sign and specify how often it will be broadcast Figure 30 Radio Settings CWID Radio Settings RF Settings CWID RF Tests CWID Enabled Disabled CWiDCalsig CWID Interval o minutes Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked db you wil need te reset the unit for them to take effect CWID If CWID is enabled the Viper will broadcast the specified CWID if disabled the Viper will not The default setting is Disabled CWID Call Sign This is the CWID or call sign to be broadcast if CWID is enabled CWID Interval This is the time interval in minutes after which the CWID will be broadcast Save Click Save to save any changes you have made See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 48 4 2 3 RF TESTS RF Tests is the third righ
25. 5 Completion and Reset ccccccccccsssccccsseccceeeceseseccseecccaaueeeseuscesseeeessaueeesaaeeeesanees 38 2 Ad45D6p56 rr WeDInteltdt Bue canimus t bd dca nN eR M UM EM MM EE 39 AS EL ore ULT 40 4 1 1 DUBIE SES SU cositas pa ER antro R Du ba uasa P hA e D M d uM D LEE op d T mn Casey ADM enean ua 40 4 1 2 PES ATUS e E r aes 42 4 1 3 irwjfeworciamlp cer 43 42 Radio Settings sot ox DEO a A ure a ira e Nei uro eau ua M ea emu T hs 45 4 2 1 Make ciiin TD M 45 4 2 2 Gp 48 4 2 3 sjaNK rins S 49 MS RFNEWOK SGINE T ET H 51 4 3 1 RR eid el EE LL DOE T TUE EU 51 4 3 2 RE BanOWiGEn Walia s Gmelin edel o teet oe ve anode atti er bass ie e on ea oed Ea dete suben telo cov e drea eis deo soduf cdd 53 4 3 3 Misil iglofe dip jo I Hr 57 4 3 4 Gogas CUINE PR NR E m 62 4 3 5 VIAN M aeres 64 4 3 6 QO SE ECR ere bt qu IER DISP EI eee SM ecu dL Mam cc en ee eee eee A E nent E OST ue 68 4 3 7 Siem aS ECS m E iets sa eas cutee wate ait teenie ea enn ica eae ean cede eect ee eae eeds 72 Ate AN SCTE e ee NET E 73 4 4 1 FAN SCHIE S dr n Q 73 4 4 2 DACP e siue nuu ELE HL ML LN uL IE EIE 75 4 4 3 SIN TP nisse uc tcl utem ucl ad Acca te 76 4 4 4 BFOAGCASE VII LIGASE RET EE 77 4 4 5 VLAN
26. 95 91 90 86 dBm 114 111 114 111 114 111 111 108 dBm 106 103 106 103 106 103 104 101 dBm 100 96 100 96 100 96 97 93 dBm 92 88 92 88 92 88 89 85 dBm 111 108 111 108 111 108 108 105 dBm 104 101 104 101 104 101 101 98 dBm 97 94 97 94 97 94 94 91 dBm 88 85 88 85 88 85 85 82 dBm 100 kHz 64 kbps 103 100 100 97 dBm 192 kbps 96 93 93 90 dBm 256 kbps 89 86 86 83 dBm 80 77 77 74 dBm Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 140 Receiver Bandwidth 140 5018 60x Bit Rate ETSI Mode 12 5 kHz ETSI Useable Senstitvity 8 kbps 10 Bit Error 16 kbps Rate BER 24 kbps 25 kHz ETSI 16 kbps 111 108 104 101 96 92 111 108 104 101 96 92 110 107 32 kbps 103 100 48 kbps 96 92 100 kHz Spurious Response Rejection Intermodulation Rejection 110 107 103 100 Typical Max Adjacent Channel Rejection min lt 15 ms Band End to Band End 17 dBm 50 mW max dBm Channel Switching Time Receive Input Power Tx to Rx Time All 1ms ms 5 ms ETSI Versions Connectors Antenna Connector TNC Female Tx Rx Serial Setup Port DE 9F Serial Terminal Server DE 9F Ethernet RJ 45 10 BaseT auto MDIX Power I O CalAmp P N 415 7108 113 Weidm ller P N 1615550000 4
27. ALLEN BRADLEY COMPACTLOGIX OR CONTROLLOGIX SERIES PLCS SENDS TOO MANY CIP FORWARD OPEN AND CIP FORWARD CLOSE When using the Ethernet IP with CIP communications protocol with Allen Bradley CompactLogix or ControlLogix PLCs and with other Logix series PLCs the option to use Connected or Unconnected is available in the Message Configuration By default the Connected checkbox is selected and therefore it will add additional messages CIP Forward Open and CIP Forward Close for each read write operation when the next message is sent outside the message timeout period The default setting is 30 seconds To lower the on air traffic the Connected checkbox should be unchecked Unconnected Connected or Unconnected operation description for CIP When the Connected checkbox is checked Connected if there is not a CIP connection already established then the controller sends an Open Forward CIP Connection command and waits for the Good response before transmitting the read or write command The CIP connection remains open as long as there is activity before the timeout default 30 seconds Any message instruction sending commands to the same device can use the same CIP and TCP connection If this timeout is reached a close CIP connection is sent When the Connected checkbox is unchecked Unconnected the controller uses the Unconnected CIP service to transmit the read or write command so there is less overhead The Connection timeout is on a per mess
28. Advanced Settings only Advanced Settings Show Hide Silently Keep Retag Tag Delete Drop Packet Packet Packet Tag Packet Unchanged With PVID With PVID Ingress Packet Untagged VID 0 VID PVID VID PVID VID is in Table VID I PVID VID is not in Table Egress Packet Untagged VID 0 VID PVID VID PVID VID is in Table VID PVID VID is not in Table O GO 00000 00000 00000 O Cancel M Jams Delete VLAN ID From Table 1 14094 Clear Table table empty If you Save changes te any parameters marked Ay you will need te reset the unit for them to take effect The Advanced Settings provide options for ingress packets packets coming into the Viper and egress packets packets leaving the Viper and for maintaining and displaying a VLAN Member Table The title of the Advanced Settings section of the RF Network Settings VLAN tab will reflect the Port mode selected This section allows you to specify what actions are to be taken with ingress and egress packets based on their VLAN ID VID tag or absence of a VID tag VID is the VLAN ID contained in the packet PVID is the Port VLAN ID the VLAN ID associated with the interface and configured in the Viper Web Interface Ingress Packet Untagged The packet has no VLAN ID tag If incoming packets are untagged you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or tag the packets with the PVID For Untagged Port Mode the defa
29. Auto MDIX capability of the Ethernet transceiver Tx and Rx functions could be swapped 1 3 3 2 SETUP AND COM PORTS E ELI SHEL The SETUP and COM serial connections are DE 9F RS 232 ports Refer to the following table for pin out descriptions and Section 4 3 4 for control line configurations of DCD DTR RTS and CTS control lines Serial port considerations e Viper SETUP and COM ports are Data Communication Equipment DCE devices e In general equipment connected to the Viper serial ports is Data Terminal Equipment DTE and a straight through cable is recommended Note If a DCE device is connected to the Viper serial ports a null modem cable or adapter is required Table 4 Pin Out for DCE SETUP and COM Port 9 Contact DE 9 Connector SETUP COM port Contact Signal Name Signal Direction Pin Out Data Carrier Detect DCD DTE lt DCE Receive Data RxD DTE lt DCE Transmit Data TxD DTE gt DCE 6 DataSet Ready DsR DICE Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 4 SETUP COM port Contact Signal Name Signal Direction 8 Clear To Send CTS DTE DCE Ring Indicator RI DTE DCE d Programmable 4 Always asserted 9 Future use 1 3 3 3 POWER CONNECTOR Viper is supplied with a right angle power connector 10 30 V DC The following table shows the pin out of the power connector Table 5 Pin Out of the Power Connector Power Co
30. B 12 November 2012 Added antenna and lightning arrestor combination Added general PLC Setup information Added new web server screens and information Added Table of Figures and List of Tables Added frequency ranges for European Union and Australia and New Zealand Added additional cross referencing Reorganized information Added RMA Request information and Factory and Technical Support information to make this manual consistent with the Viper Base Station Not officially released A December 2013 Added new models Viper SC all Viper SC models become Viper SC when upgraded with new Viper SC firmware Important Notice Because of the nature of wireless communication transmission and reception of data can never be guaranteed Data may be delayed corrupted i e have errors or be totally lost Significant delays or losses of data are rare when wireless devices such as the Viper SC are used in a normal manner with a well constructed network Viper SC should not be used in situations where failure to transmit or receive data could result in damage of any kind to the user or any other party including but not limited to personal injury or death or loss of property CalAmp accepts no responsibility for damages of any kind resulting from delays or errors in data transmitted or received using Viper SC or for the failure of Viper SC to transmit or receive such data Copyright Notice 2010 2013 CalAmp All rights reserve
31. Command Shell through this port if Member of Management VLAN is enabled This is true only for ports of Tagged type Ports of Untagged type can always access the internal functions of the Viper HTTP FTP Command Shell Advanced Settings Show or Hide Click Show to show advanced settings in the lower part of the tab click Hide to hide the advanced settings Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note If you change the Port VLAN ID or Member of Management VLAN setting in this tab as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect 4 3 5 1 ADVANCED SETTINGS FOR RF NETWORK SETTINGS VLAN When you click Show to show the advanced settings in the VLAN tab of the RF Network Settings page the tab expands downward to show the advanced settings The following figure shows the Advanced Settings section when the Viper is configured for Router mode In Bridge mode the Viper may operate in Tagged mode or Untagged mode and this section does not appear drastically different except the name of the section will reflect the port mode selected and some selections are less restricted than those shown in the following figure Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 65 Figure 41 RF Network Settings VLAN tab showing
32. D5 LOPO Rc S E T OE E E EE E T T 9 1 3 1 BAC A 9 1 5 2 Two and Three Piece Kit Additional Items eeesseeeesseeeeeeeneeennnee nennen 10 2 Network Architecture And System Planning ccccccecccsscccssccceneceeeceeeeceeeecetenseteeeeeeceeeesenesens 11 Ai niei IEC i U e E E E T A AAE 11 2 1 1 Point to Point Network s ssssssssssssrerssserersssreresssrrrosserrressererossrrresssreresserreossereeessreressererosserresssreresseeeeesseree 12 2 1 2 Pontto Multipoint ou Tod AMO ETE 12 2 1 3 Report py Exceplion COMMB UI dE Oleum seem dta meu a Vd EpRU t EMERA QUE VE ESAME E FU Sa Vrbe n Ra VEU a aac ae 13 2 1 4 Extending the Coverage Area with a Relay POint ccccccssscccceseccccesececeesececeuececeeeeceseeecessuseeesenecetseneeets 13 Z2 MIP OG TONE MOOC ater inb PV Piave E E ce east ed MN DIM UI UNI UM MI 14 2 2 1 BB VMI OCS oso PIE TUUREERO ERA UIN ETIN D II IRI DENN ENTUM UDIN NDIE aaa epee ue DPA MES 14 2 2 7 ROUtEr IV OGG m 16 2 2 3 Viper Router Generator VRG Program amp asusssitak esses t tiod det aa pM ePR o UR EI aM brides e DAR LOB e La a eve bs aM Eee QUE Nb ade 19 2 2 4 Multispeed Networking iussescxsurscunk ost txF S YE quK uU tiiv VP C KO UI rr ai AT wie FRE ld tu swa a ENPH GN Clu eUE VEI Y RUE DN PNE RE UT SUE rEFN TUAE 19 2 3 Understanding
33. General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 205 100 Enter IP Address Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Enter Subnet Mask Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Validate settings upon exit After you have connected your PC to the Viper SC by Ethernet cable and powered the Viper SC start your Web browser and enter 192 168 205 1 in the address bar A connection Login window or Web Server Authentication Window or Web Security window similar to one of the following appears Connect to 192 168 705 1 Web Server Authentication User name 47 Admin A Remember my password The server 192 168 2051 at Web Server Authentication requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection Gin ma Admin i a LEEFT RRR EE Remember my credentials Enter a user name and password The default user name and password the Viper SC ship with are Admin and ADMINISTRATOR both Admin and ADMINISTRATOR are case sensitive enter in all capital
34. ID setting in this tab as indicated by the yellow alert symbol UN a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 44 4 2 RADIO SETTINGS The Radio Settings page contains three tabs RF Settings CWID and RF Tests 4 2 1 RF SETTINGS RF Settings is the first left most tab of the Radio Settings page To navigate to this tab select Radio Settings from the main menu In this tab you can view the Radio Capabilities and configure the channel number frequency range for transmit and receive bandwidth transmit power and other settings that determine how the radio will communicate Figure 29 Radio Settings RF Settings Radio Settings RF Settings CWID RF Tests Frequency Range Min 328 000000 MHz Max 960 000000 MHz Output Power Range Min 1 0 Watts Max 8 0 Watts Transmitter Enabled Disabled Channel Number IThe Transmitter is disabled TX Frequency MHz 944 000000 RX Frequency MHz TX Power Bandwidth KHz Data and Control Packet Bit Rate Kbps Carrier Sense Level Threshold 110 000000 dBm Listen Before Transmit Enabled listen to data only Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked PN you wil need to reset the unit for them te take effect Frequency Range and Output Power Range Frequency Range and Output Power Range are factory set and vary as determined by Viper model o
35. Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 138 APPENDIX B VIPER SC SPECIFICATIONS These specifications are typical and subject to change without notice GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Model Number Frequency Range Channel Bandwidths Available FCC IC Certified Models 140 5018 502 6 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 140 5028 504 6 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 140 5048 302 6 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 140 5048 502 6 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 140 5098 304 880 902 MHz 12 5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 140 5098 504 12 5 kHz 25 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz ETSI ACMA Certified Models 140 5018 600 12 5 kHz 25 kHz ETSI AS NZ 140 5048 400 12 5 kHz 25 kHz ETSI AS NZ 140 5048 600 12 5 kHz 25 kHz ETSI AS NZ Frequency Stability 1 0 ppm for all models except the models specified below 0 50 ppm for 140 5028 504 140 5098 304 and 130 5098 504 Simplex Half Duplex 1 25 kHz 10 30 V DC Negative GND The Viper is UL approved when powered with a listed Class 2 power supply 500 Specified Temperature 30 to 60 C Operating Temperature 40 to 70 C Storage Temperature 40 to 85 C non condensing RH Operating Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing RH Rx Current Drain at 25 C DC Input 10 V DC Input 20 V DC Input 30 V 690 mA max 345 mA max 260 mA max 600 mA typ 300 mA typ 225 mA typ Tx Current Drain at 25 C WKI AoT DC Input 10 V DC Input 20 V DC Input 30 V Max Power 6 0 A m
36. Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 90 4 6 SERIAL The Serial page contains four tabs Com Port Serial Port VLAN and Advanced 4 6 1 COM PORT AND SETUP PORT COM Port is the first left most tab and the Setup Port tab is next to it to the right To navigate to the COM Port tab select Serial from the main menu to navigate to the Setup Port tab select Serial from the main menu and then select Setup Port The two tabs are nearly identical and provide access to all of the same settings the only difference is the port that the configuration settings are for In each of the two tabs you can enable or disable the applicable port and set serial Communication parameters for it Figure 55 Serial COM Port Serial COM Port Speed Data bits Stop bits Parity DCD Control Packet Forwarding Threshold Flow Control Connection Control Status DOWN Advanced Settings Com Port 52 Enable Disable O7 Ga 01 O2 O Odd Even 9 None Always asserted MARK character time CTS based Switched DTR O Show 9Hide Cancel Refresh If you Save changes te any parameters marked FN you wil need te reset the unit fer them te take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 91 Figure 56 Serial Setup Port Com Port Setup Port VLAN Advanced SETUP Port Speed Data bits Stop bits Parity DCD Control Packet Forwarding Threshold Flow Co
37. Local Area Network LAN Thus all units in the network can communicate directly with all other units in the network Each Viper has only one IP address assigned to it and the subnet mask is the same for every Viper in the network Bridge communications does not require each Viper to have a unique IP address but it is highly recommended and necessary for remote programming of the radio Every Viper ships from the factory with the default Ethernet IP address of 192 168 205 1 and a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 The default subnet of the Viper consists of addresses from 192 168 205 0 to 192 168 205 255 The first and last IP address of each subnet is reserved no matter what the subnet size is The first IP address in the subnet is the Network ID The last IP address in the subnet is the Broadcast Address Bridge Mode Example 1 This example illustrates a sample Viper network The subnet consists of IP addresses ranging from 192 168 205 0 to 192 168 205 255 The subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 This subnet is sometimes indicated as 192 168 205 1 24 since the subnet mask 255 255 255 0 contains 24 ones followed by 8 zeros when converted to binary e The first address 192 168 205 0 is reserved for the Network ID e The last address 192 168 205 255 is reserved for the broadcast address e There are 254 valid IP addresses that may be assigned to hosts on the network Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Network ID 192 168 205 0 Broadcast Address 192 16
38. NAT Enabled RF Private Ethernet Private Private Network Private RF Network Public Network Host 1 Host 2 Eth 192 168 205 2 Eth 172 31 5 2 Viper 1 NAT Enabled Eth Private Viper 2 NAT Enabled RF Private RF 10 0 14 203 Ethernet 192 168 205 1 RF 10 0 14 186 Ethernet 172 31 5 1 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 162 An IP packet whose source IP address originates from the RF network and is sent towards the Ethernet network will have its source IP address replaced by the Ethernet IP address of Viper 2 Notice in this configuration the Ethernet IP address for Viper 1 is considered private and the RF IP address for Viper 2 is considered private The following figure shows how packets will be modified as the packets pass through the network Figure 89 Packet Flow Ethernet and RF Private Private Network Private RF Network Public Network Packet 1 Packet 1 Packet 1 9 2 Source Address 10 0 14 203 Source Address 17 31 5 1 5 2 Source Address 192 168 20 1 Destination Address 172 3 Destination Address 172 31 5 2 Destination Address 172 31 5 2 Eth 192 168 205 2 Eth 172 31 5 2 E n 9 Viper 1 NAT Enabled Eth Private Viper 2 NAT Enabled RF Private In the following figure the RF interface of Viper 2 is considered private NAT is disabled for Viper 1 Viper 1 changes the source address of the packet making Viper 2 believe that t
39. Network 192 168 205 0 being protected from the Public Network 172 31 5 0 Viper 1 NAT Eth interface is enabled and Viper 2 NAT is disabled The Host 172 31 5 2 cannot send packets directly to the Private Network because it is hidden In this example Host 172 31 5 2 thinks that the IP packets are coming from 10 0 14 203 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 166 Figure 94 Port 2000 is redirected to 192 168 205 125 23 Private Network RF Network Public Network Host 1 Host 2 Eth 192 168 205 2 Port 23 Eth 172 31 5 2 Port 1435 Viper 1 NAT Enabled Eth Private Viper 2 NAT Disabled RF 10 0 14 203 Port 2000 Ethernet 192 168 205 1 RF 10 0 14 186 Ethernet 172 31 5 1 Port Redirected When Host 172 31 5 2 wants to send packets to Host 192 168 205 2 the packets are sent to 10 0 14 203 NAT port translation allows Host 172 31 5 2 1435 port 1325 to send TCP packets to 192 168 205 5 23 port 23 by sending the packets to 10 0 14 203 2000 port 2000 The following figure shows how the packets would be modified as they moved through the network Figure 95 Packet Flow Port Redirection Private Network RF Network Packet 1 Packet 1 Packet 1 Source Address 172 31 5 2 1435 Source Address 172 31 5 2 1435 Source Address 172 31 5 2 1435 Destination 192 168 205 3 23 Destination 10 0 14 203 2000 Destination 10 0 14 203 2000 4 Host 1 Host 2
40. Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance in the country where used could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page ii TABLE OF CONTENTS ou 020 207 7220 mm 1 EE OEN a DESCRIP FIOM MEO m mem 1 1 2 OBbftstienal Cheb 3e EBPISUES eee eee eee VP UMP nee een eee nec M ee ne en ee ee ee ee egre a tq dT E E 1 WS TA 5 e CS CI OM Nm 2 1 3 1 Siu cc CRISE o ARI CR 2 1 3 2 LED un ERE m ee ee ee ee ee eee 2 1 3 3 Front Pane RE m uu 3 14 Part Numbers apd Availability NE mmm 6 1 4 1 A ofa gee ER O pe 6 1 4 2 FNR and Caples TETTE 8
41. Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 49 SINAD Signal to Noise And Distortion is a measure of signal degradation by unwanted or extraneous signals including noise and distortion The higher the figure for SINAD the better the quality of the received signal The SINAD figure is expressed in decibels dB and is determined by the formula SINAD 10Log SND ND Where SND combined Signal Noise Distortion power level ND combined Noise Distortion power level Odb lt SINAD lt 50 dB The receiver must be fed a 1 kHz tone Click Start Meter to start the SINAD meter The calculated SINAD value is displayed Click Refresh Meter to refresh the SINAD value calculated by the Meter Click Stop Meter to stop the SINAD meter The PING command is a network tool used to test whether a particular host is reachable on the IP network It works by sending an ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol packet echo request to a target host and listening for the ICMP echo response Ping estimates the round trip time in milliseconds and records any packet loss Enter IP Address Enter an IP address in dot decimal format of the unit to ping For example 192 168 205 100 Execute Ping Once you have entered an IP address to for the Ping command click Execute Ping to execute the Ping command Allow enough time 20 seconds to handle slow or non responding targets If the Ping command executed above was successf
42. Type There are three different types of routes e Connected Direct physical connection on the Ethernet port e Static User defined routes e Proprietary Routes learned by the Viper unit that point to over the air destinations Refresh Click Refresh to update the Neighbor Table to show the most recent information available Fields in the Routing Entries section of the Routing Table tab allow you to manually add or delete entries to or from the Routing Table above Destination Network IP Address Enter the IP Address for the Destination Network Netmask Enter the Netmask for the Destination Network Gateway IP Address Enter the IP Address for the Gateway RF MAC Address Enter the RF MAC Address of the destination Gateway Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 86 Add To add a Routing Entry enter the IP Address and Netmask of the Destination Network and the IP Address and RF MAC Address of the Gateway for the Routing Entry to be added and then click Add See Note below Delete To remove an entry from the Routing Table enter the IP Address and Netmask of the Destination Network and the IP Address and RF MAC Address of the Gateway shown in the table above and then click Delete See Note below Note If you Add or Delete routing entries in the Routing Table a reset of the Viper is required before the routing table change will take effect as indicated by the yellow alert sym
43. Viper RF Subnet Mask for all Viper 255 0 0 0 Router Mode Example 2 Each Viper has an Ethernet IP address on a unique network In this example each network connected to the Viper s local Ethernet port has 14 valid IP addresses that may be used for the Viper PLCs RTUs computers or other Ethernet equipment that may be connected The subnet mask of the RF IP addresses has been changed to ensure that the RF IP network does not overlap any of the Ethernet networks In this scenario the RF IP addresses must be manually programmed to ensure that every Viper has an RF IP address in the network and that no RF IP address is used twice Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 17 Viper 1 Ethernet IP Address Viper 2 Ethernet IP Address Viper 3 Ethernet IP Address Viper 4 Ethernet IP Address Viper 177 Ethernet IP Address Viper 178 Ethernet IP Address 10 200 1 1 28 10 200 1 17 28 10 200 1 33 28 10 200 1 49 28 10 200 12 1 28 10 200 12 17 28 RF IP Address RF IP Address RF IP Address RF IP Address RF IP Address RF IP Address 10 0 0 1 16 10 0 0 2 16 10 0 0 3 16 10 0 0 4 16 10 0 0 177 16 10 0 0 178 16 Figure 10 Router Mode Example 2 Viper 2 Ethernet IP 10 200 1 17 RF IP 10 0 0 2 Viper 1 Ethernet IP 10 200 1 1 RF IP 10 0 0 1 Viper 178 Ethernet IP 10 200 12 17 RF IP 10 0 0 178 Viper 177 Ethernet IP 10 200 12 1 RF IP 10 0 0 177 Vi
44. Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 108 Disable VPN Clients available on VPN servers only Sends a VPN Disable command to all clients regardless of the VPN server s state Notes The command is broadcast a few times based on the Network Latency VPN setting A server can send only one command at a time When VPN clients with a user accessing the VPN configuration cannot process commands from the server Note Results of clicking Enable VPN or Disable VPN are not immediately reflected in the Status and Statistics Click Refresh to update values displayed in this section Operating Mode Displays whether the Viper is operating as a VPN Server or Client The Viper must be configured as an Access Point RF device to be a VPN Server the Viper must be configured as a non Access Point RF device to be a VPN Client Status Displays the status of the VPN tunnel service When the VPN is operational this will display OK Ready if VPN is not operational this will display Not Ready and the reason it is not operational Number of Tunnels Number of active VPN tunnels originating or terminating in the device This number is subdivided into tunnels that are ready and tunnels currently undergoing key exchange One additional shared tunnel is used for special types of traffic See VPN for an explanation of this shared tunnel and types of traffic this tunnel is provided for Tunnels Ready Lists the numb
45. aise ccna a goiter ga ee tea a case 79 4 4 6 Ethernet PED oscuros iato D balm laude boda cud out EIA N A EEE N T A E EE at 84 Ge ROUTO erener I U e 85 4 5 1 ROUDE 1 ane EDU 85 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page iv 4 5 3 dpt rm 88 o lt DROP ane Ee ree cc rrr reor rer 91 4 6 1 COM Part and Setup POLE csset ane rinde ue ub an vive Eu ead n ettet uoi sedens ta etas 91 4 6 2 VEAN tr ET 98 4 6 3 PRON GING OO NR EE Om ER 101 UN MEM dieere E 102 4 7 1 PASS WOLA e P 102 4 7 2 hizemzqeadcuo E E 103 4 7 3 RADIUS serene ee 104 4 7 4 YVEN soit acce oras Nec M Md i nA Md MN clo ute Motto cia dte Mieten MEE 106 MEME inociH TEE Om 114 4 8 1 Watt bee ee ind oi ATE E E E DD EE EE 114 4 8 2 Remote Statistics ides massis tho a En dte dm Eve vs Eo ta umi EP EOS vasco baud iu pre eda um uox eu ai iesus u Daned E Vds 116 4 8 3 Ji Y 117 4 8 4 OnlineDIdg MOSEICS oo eite a titu ttti a Ran btaetatas Ch M d solide tta a iU ice bsc US c E aebu taa EUR 120 4 8 5 Radio LOS e 123 49 Device Mantenan Cassis aca m P 12
46. application RADIUS Timeout Amount of time in seconds to wait fro a response when sending an authentication request to the RADIUS server If the response is not received the request will be resent as many times as specified by the RADIUS Retries setting Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 105 RADIUS Retries Number of times the RADIUS client resends the authentication request message to the RADIUS server if it does not respond with an authentication granted or authentication denied message Delay Between Retries Amount of time in seconds to wait between retries when sending the RADIUS authentication request to the RADIUS server Save Click Save to save any changes you make in this tab Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made in this tab 4 7 4 VPN VPN Virtual Private Network is the fourth from left tab of the Security page To navigate to this tab select Security from the main menu and click VPN This tab allows you to set a password to access VPN settings enable or disable VPN and view Status and Statistics for VPN tunnels VPN Concepts A VPN secures network traffic by transporting it within encrypted tunnels between two VPN devices A VPN tunnel ensures data privacy over any type of network Multiple physical networks can exist between two VPN devices A VPN tunnel thus provides a virtual single hop network connection between two VPN devices
47. be used to enroll all the remotes for the first time then disable After a Manual Scan disabling the discovery mode locks all routes into place Review all Neighbor entries and edit them if necessary to ensure that they are the correct and most reliable RF paths and also delete RF paths that are not required For example in most master and remote polling configurations the remotes only need to have the master in their Neighbor Tables Disabled This will disable neighbor discoveries and allow you to Add Static Entries or use the Viper Route Generator VRG application to populate the neighbor entries Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 59 Note CalAmp strongly recommends visiting the CalAmp support website and downloading the VRG application If necessary contact CalAmp Technical Support for assistance with using the VRG application Save Click Save to save your changes if you change the method or disable neighbor discovery Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any change There are five states of operation reported in the local status section of the tab Ready Scanning for Neighbors Saving Neighbor Table Testing Connectivity or Disabled Ready The Neighbor Discovery module is in the Ready state when it is not scanning for other units If the Viper is operating in Manual Scan it does nothing If the Viper is operating in the Auto Scan it monitors the keep alive packets of other units and s
48. connected to the Viper when the DHCP server is enabled It represents the maximum number of DHCP clients that will be able to lease an IP address from the Viper Lease Duration The length of time in minutes that each IP address will be leased to a DHCP client before it expires and a new lease is required Zero 0 minutes means leases do not expire Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway assigned by the DHCP Server In router mode the default gateway is the IP address of the Viper itself In bridge mode the default gateway is 0 0 0 0 To override the default setting enter a valid IP address to specify the gateway Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 75 Note If you change any of the above setting in this tab as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect 4 4 3 SNTP SNTP is the third from left tab of the LAN Settings page To navigate to this tab select LAN Settings from the main menu and click SNTP From this tab you can set parameters for the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP Figure 46 LAN Settings SNTP LAN jroadcast thernet LAN Settings DHCP SNTP 5 eig VLAN Foren Settings a Multicast PHY Client Enabled
49. descriptions Table 14 DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point Values and Descriptions Value Description Protocol The protocol number in the IP header of the packet Possible selections are All ICMP TCP and UDP Leave this filed set to All if this value does not matter TCP ACK Only When this option is checked the filter will look for TCP packets with a TCP header only no TCP data and with only the ACK flag set Transmit Queue Specify the above transmit queue to use for packets that correspond to all of the criteria in the filter defined above Add Click to add filters Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 71 Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes to filters This area displays in table format any filters that have been defined above and added Before packets are transmitted over the RF interface these filters are applied to determine the proper RF transmit queue to use The filters are passed from the top down until a match is found These filters only apply when the QoS module is enabled Delete All clicking the Delete All link will clear all filters that have been defined and are displayed in the filter table 4 3 7 QOS STATISTICS QoS Statistics is the seventh right most and final tab of the RF Network Settings page To navigate to this tab select RF Network Settings from the main navigation menu and click QoS Statistics This tab provides a table of statisti
50. for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 58 Manual Scan Auto Scan or Disabled Select Manual Scan or Auto Scan for the method of neighbor discovery or select Disabled to disable neighbor discovery Here is what happens when each of these options is selected and then saved The default setting is Manual Scan Manual Scan The Viper starts in the Ready state In the Ready state the unit is quiet no neighbor discovery control messages are sent If the user clicks Force Scan button in Control Operations section near the bottom the Viper initiates the Scanning for Neighbors state in which the unit is learning about other remote units and the remote units are learning about the Viper The Viper goes from the Scanning for Neighbors state to the Saving Neighbor Table state when it stops learning any new neighbor information for a specified amount of time this time interval can be changed using the parameter neighborDiscovery convergeTimeout expressed in milliseconds In the Saving Neighbor Table state the content of the neighbor table is stored into nonvolatile memory Then if the unit reboots the content of the neighbor table is retrieved from this nonvolatile memory Finally the Viper goes from the Saving Neighbor Table state to the Ready state Auto Scan The Viper starts in the Scanning For Neighbors state In the Scanning For Neighbors state the Viper is learning about remote units and the remote units are learning about th
51. four modes of transport TCP Server TCP Client UDP or TCP Client Server Parameters for each of these modes are defined in Table 15 TCP UDP Parameter Usage TCP Client UDP TCP Client Server TCP Server Mode In this mode of operation the Viper acts as a TCP server It can accept up to 256 TCP connections from remote endpoints Data received from any remote endpoint is sent over the serial port Data received from the serial which follows port is sent to every endpoint connected to the TCP server e Local Port Number In TCP Server mode you must set the local port number parameter It identifies the port used by the TCP server when accepting connections from the remote endpoints e Remote IP Address and Remote Port Number These parameters are not used In TCP Server mode TCP Client Mode In this mode of operation the Viper local endpoint tries to establish a TCP connection with a TCP server remote endpoint Once the TCP connection is established any data received from the remote endpoint is sent over the serial interface Any data received from the serial interface is sent to the remote endpoint e Local Port Number This parameter is used to identify the local endpoint The IP stack automatically decides the value assigned to the local port number You can let the IP stack decide the value of the local IP address local IP address 0 0 0 0 or select a specific local IP address as long as it is the IP address of one
52. from the date of purchase when used within the limits set forth in the specifications section of this manual The manufacturer s Warranty Statement is available on the following page If the product proves defective during the warranty period contact CalAmp Customer Service to obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA RMA Request Contact Customer Service CalAmp 1401 North Rice Avenue Oxnard CA 93030 Tel 805 987 9000 Fax 805 987 8359 BE SURE TO HAVE THE EQUIPMENT MODEL AND SERIAL NUMBER AND BILLING AND SHIPPING ADDRESSES ON HAND WHEN CALLING When returning a product mark the RMA clearly on the outside of the package Include a complete description of the problem and the name and telephone number of a contact person RETURN REQUESTS WILL NOT BE PROCESSED WITHOUT THIS INFORMATION For units in warranty customers are responsible for shipping charges to CalAmp For units returned out of warranty customers are responsible for all shipping charges Return shipping instructions are the responsibility of the customer Product Documentation CalAmp reserves the right to update its products software or documentation without obligation to notify any individual or entity Product updates may result in differences between the information provided in this manual and the product shipped For the most current product documentation and application notes visit www calamp com Tech Support CalAmp 1401 North Rice Avenue Oxnard CA
53. is generally not recommended Heartbeat messages should be disabled where possible If this is not possible then heartbeat messages should only be sent from one endpoint Their interval should be 4 minutes and start 4 minutes after connection idle time no data sent in either direction If heartbeats are used depending on the number of connections using them and their interval the resulting traffic load needs to be evaluated to assess their impact on the on air network traffic Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 182 AVOID UNNECESSARY TRAFFIC OVER THE AIR NETWORK Monitoring Remote PLCs with Monitoring Application Tools Continuously monitoring remote PLCs for monitoring purposes only via the on air network adds additional traffic This should be avoided unless required Some of these software tools are made to run on local networks high bandwidth rather than over the air If used set their timeouts as described above in Messaging with TCP and TCP Connection Timeout Some applications when closed still leave their TCP communication layer running So even if the main display is closed background monitoring still occurs If this is suspected use Wireshark to capture whether communication persists or turn the monitoring PC off temporally to view any impact this has Remote Alive Check Sometimes the PLC could perform pings in parallel to the communication connection The ping result may be used to deter
54. letters and click OK Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 32 3 6 INTRODUCTION TO THE VIPER SC WEB INTERFACE All operating parameters of the Viper SC are set through a web interface in your web browser once you have logged in The built in web server of the Viper SC makes configuration possible from any computer with network access to the Viper The following figure shows the Home page of the Viper Web Interface Figure 18 CalAmp Viper SC IP Router Web Interface home page Garam Viper SCY IP Router HELP HOME RESET Home E Unit Status HE Status Basic Settings Station Name 900 SC Model Number 110 50938 502 LAN IP Address 192168205 ETE LAN MAC Address 00 04 99 80 32 86 Security AOE EREA hea emis HERE TER DATARADIO Viper HW PCB 280 03470 rmware Version defase ipr 3 6 R201307162030 IP Forwarding Mode Router Station Mode Remote DC Input Voltage 138W LX Transceiver Temperature 265600 VPN Status Not ready vpn service disabled Refresh Acknowledge Unit Status The first time you log in to the Viper SC if no configuration changes have been made to the unit from the factory you will see a message instructing you to Change default settings Use the SetUp Wizard Note If the computer you are using has previously been used to set up a CalAmp router you may need to delete browser history specifically temporary internet files for
55. on VLAN ID are reduced When the Viper is operating in bridge mode VLAN can be configured to operate in tagged or untagged mode Figure 48 LAN Settings VLAN with Advanced Settings hidden AN oadcast Settings Rar kt E eee aaa Mode Q Untagged Tagged Port VLAN ID PVID 1 4094 Ethernet VLAN oy Member Of Management VLAN 9 Enabled Disabled Advanced Settings Show 9 Hide Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked db you wil need to reset the unit for them to take effect Mode Select whether the LAN interface will operate in VLAN Untagged or Tagged mode Untagged Devices on this interface are not using VLAN tags Incoming ingress packets are tagged with the port VLAN ID PVID VLAN tags are removed on outgoing Egress packets Tagged Devices on this interface are using VLAN tags Incoming Ingress packets are forwarded with their VLAN ID Outgoing Egress packets are also keeping their VLAN tags See the Advanced Settings section that follows for more options Port VLAN ID Sets the Port VLAN ID PVID Member of Management VLAN When the Management VLAN is enabled you can access the internal functions of the Viper HTTP FTP Command Shell through this port if Member of Management VLAN is enabled This is true only for ports of Tagged type Ports of Untagged type can always access the internal functions of the Viper HTTP FTP Command Shell Note After any of
56. settings in this tab as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 56 4 3 3 NEIGHBOR TABLE Neighbor Table is the third from left tab of the RF Network Settings page To navigate to this tab select RF Network Settings from the main menu and click Network Table The appearance of the Neighbor Table displayed and the controls provided to generate build or maintain it will differ depending on whether the Viper is configured as a Bridge or a Router CEAR NEIGHBOR TABLE FOR BRIDGE MODE In Bridge mode the Neighbor Table tab allows you to add relay points to the Neighbor Table manually by adding the RF MAC address for each Viper Vipers may be designated as Dynamic or as a Relay Point Remote Units may also be deleted from the list if required The Neighbor Table feature allows unicast data packets to be sent as a directed message to a Viper that has been designated as a relay point Other relay points will not repeat this message However if a broadcast message is sent then all relay points will repeat the broadcast IP packets Note Most serial data will be sent as broadcast packets unless specifically programmed as unicast UDP or TCP packets Figure 35 RF Network Settings Neighbor Table Bridge Mode LIO 5 Statistics R Format xx xx xx Add Viper 80 00 02 Dynamic Delete 80 00 03 R
57. table provides the RF MAC address of the Viper for reference Table columns are as follows Remote Unit The RF MAC address of the neighboring remote unit This table is updated every time the Viper sends or receives data to or from the remote unit If the RF MAC address is prefixed with an asterisk or star it means this unit was learned of through a Relay Point RP unit RF IP Address The RF IP Address of the remote unit Received Packets Number of IP packets sent by the remote unit to this unit and received A packet is bad or failed if at least one of the CRC the length or the system identifier is incorrect or it is simply missing not received at all by this unit The Viper is able to detect missing packets because of the sequence number in each packet PER Packet Error Rate is expressed as a percentage that is calculated using the following formula PER bad bad good x 100 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 116 When the Packet Error Rate is indicated by a question mark it is because the unit cannot determine the value This is because the sequence number is not included in the packets received over the air or because no IP packet has been received yet To make sure a remote unit includes a sequence number in its packets the OIP duplicate packet removal feature must be enabled on it Transmitted Packets Total number of IP packets transmitted
58. technology checks the air wave for a carrier before transmitting and Ethernet CSMA Carrier Sense Multiple Access CSMA is an Ethernet collision avoidance mechanism technology built into to all Ethernet connections However these technologies must still be supplemented by the HMI PLC polling master to optimize RF data traffic Some HMI PLC Ethernet applications may depend solely on Ethernet CSMA to control the flow of messages to avoid RF collisions in a Viper data network This may flood the network with multiple polling messages making it difficult for the RTUs to acquire the airwave to transmit their reply messages This will cause the RTUs to compete for airtime and a dominant RTU may be created While the dominant RTU radio is transmitting the other RTUs will send their reply messages to their connected Viper SC Viper SCs will buffer reply messages because the dominant RTU radio is transmitting carrier is present A Viper SC will buffer while a carrier is present a reply message until it can capture the airwave carrier absent to transmit There could be five or six RTU radios in a small system or 10 or 20 in a large system which could be trying to capture the airwaves to transmit The RTUs will not respond in the order they were polled but will respond when they are ready and have captured the airwaves The dominant RTU is created because it happens to reply at just the right time and be in the right order in the polling sequence A
59. the OSI network model This tab contains settings for configuration or negotiation of physical bitrate and duplex mode of the Viper SC Ethernet interface Figure 51 Ethernet PHY radcast an Ethernet DHCP sNTP Bre zur Settings Multicast x PHY Auto Negotiate PHY Bitrate Force to 100 Mbps Force to 10 Mbps Auto Negotiate PHY Duplex Full Duplex Half Duplex Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked ih you wil need to reset the unit for them to take effect PHY Bitrate Select whether the bitrate of the transceiver will auto negotiate or be set constant at 100 Mbps or 10 Mbps Auto Negotiate Let the Ethernet interface determine the best speed based on the device facing it Force to 100 Mbps Manually configure the speed of the Ethernet interface to 100 Mbps Force to 10 Mbps Manually configure the speed of the Ethernet interface to 10 Mbps Only one of these three options may be selected as they are mutually exclusive PHY Duplex Select whether the duplex mode of the transceiver will auto negotiate or be set to Full or Half Duplex Auto Negotiate Let the Ethernet interface determine the best mode based on the device facing it Full Duplex Manually configure the mode of the Ethernet interface to Full duplex Half Duplex Manually configure the mode of the Ethernet interface to Half duplex Only one of these three options may be selected as they are mutually exclusive Save
60. the new server s key Figure 67 Security VPN AES Encryption Clear VPN Password and Master Kep Enable PN Disable PH m Security Password Radius VPN Operating mode Client Status Not ready vpn service disabled Number Of Tunnels Tunnels Ready Tunnels In Key Exchange Packets Sent Packets Received Packets Received In Error Refresh Clear If you Save changes to any parameters marked PN you wil need te reset the unit for them to take effect VPN Password Enter the VPN password leave the field empty if not set and click Login to be able to access and change VPN specific configuration settings Clear VPN Password Master Key Permits access to VPN configuration settings when the VPN password is unknown Enable VPN Enables the VPN service on the Viper Note For packets to securely pass over the network the VPN service must be enabled on both tunnel endpoints Disable VPN Disables the VPN service on the Viper Note For packets to pass over the network unsecurely the VPN service must be disabled on both tunnel endpoints Enable VPN Clients available on VPN servers only Sends a VPN Enable command to all clients regardless of the VPN server s state Notes The command is broadcast a few times based on the Network Latency VPN setting A server can send only one command at a time When VPN clients with a user accessing the VPN configuration cannot process commands from the server
61. to take effect Enable Virtual Server 1 Enable Virtual Server 2 Enable Virtual Server 3 Enable Virtual Server 5 To enable an instance of the Virtual Terminal Server click to place a check mark in the box Mode There are three modes available e TCP Server mode Up to 128 TCP clients can connect to the TCP server e TCP Client mode The client will attempt connection to the TCP server identified by the remote address and remote port number e UDP Receive UDP packets on the local port number and send UDP packets to the remote address and remote port number Local IP Address The source IP Address of outgoing packets is selected either automatically by the IP stack or it can be fixed to the IP address associated with any of the interfaces Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 89 Local Port The port used to accept incoming packets Remote IP Address The IP address packets are to be sent to Remote Port IP packets are sent to the remote IP address for the application associated with the port number entered TCP Keepalive This parameter is expressed in minutes The minimum value zero 0 disables this feature The maximum allowed value is 1440 minutes which is equal to 24 hours or 1 day The TCP keepalive feature will transmit a short keepalive message to test the TCP connection if there is no data transferred through an open TCP connection for the amount of time speci
62. to wait for the complete connection timeout before starting a new one Depending on the on air bandwidth and the number of PLC remotes only one or a few connection attempts should be outstanding If this cannot be accomplished then extend the TCP connection timeout to 20 or even 25 seconds Verify that no other adverse impact occurs CLOSING OLD TCP CONNECTION The PLC should close old TCP connections if no longer required When a TCP connection is no longer required without response or determined not usable then the PLC should close it Leaving these unused TCP connections open consumes Viper internal resources limited that could have been used for new connections Viper TCP proxy buffer resource SENDING FRAGMENTED MESSAGES For best performance the PLC should use single request message and the response from the remote should also be a single message Sending multiple small or fragmented TCP messages over the on air network is less efficient than grouping the responses for example into a larger single message Due to TCP IP message overhead and radio on air overhead a small user message with its overhead is much less efficient than multiple small user messages grouped into a single slightly larger message Also the on air protocol often has to negotiate the on air medium to be able to transmit a message depending on collision retries and traffic the performance is further affected HEARTBEAT MESSAGES Sending heartbeat messages
63. transmit a short two way handshake between the transmitting and receiving Viper This tells any adjacent Vipers that a data transmission will be taking place Adjacent Vipers will wait until the data transmission is complete before they try to capture the air by sending a new packet The two way handshake reserves air time from the network for the packet transmission It will however add a small fixed latency to each packet The added latency is small relative to the time it takes to transmit a large packet when the chance of collision is greatest However when short packets need to be transmitted it can sometimes take just as long to complete the two way handshake as it does to send the short packet For this reason the collision avoidance parameter allows the user to specify the packet size threshold above which the two way handshake is implemented For example if the Collision Avoidance is set for 128 then the Viper will complete a two way handshake before sending packets that are larger than 128 bytes reducing potential congestion The Viper will NOT complete the two way handshake before sending packets that are smaller than 128 bytes improving throughput Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 131 6 USING CALAMP PROVIDED AND CLONED VIPER CONFIGURATIONS Several configuration files are provided pre installed saved in the Viper as shipped These configuration files can be seen using the drop down m
64. units ARP Address Resolution Protocol maps Internet addresses to physical addresses Backbone The part of a network connecting the bulk of the systems and networks together handling most of the data Bandwidth The transmission capacity of a given device or network Browser An application program providing the interface to view and interact with all the information on the World Wide Web COM Port Both RS 232 serial communications ports of the Viper SC and Viper SC wireless radio modems are COM ports configured as DCE and designed to connect directly to DTE CWID a station identifier or call sign broadcast in Morse code at specified periodic intervals to identify the broadcasting radio DCE Data Communication Equipment Default Gateway A device forwarding Internet traffic from the Local Area Network LAN DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A networking protocol that allows administrators to assign temporary IP addresses to network computers by leasing an IP address to a user for a limited amount of time instead of assigning permanent IP addresses DNS Domain Name Server Translates the domain name into an IP address Domain A specific name for a network of computers DTE Data Terminal Equipment This designation is applied to equipment such as terminals PCs RTUs PLCs etc DTE is designed to connect to DCE Dynamic IP Address A temporary IP address assigned by a DHCP server
65. various conditions Fade margin expressed in dB is the maximum tolerable reduction in received signal strength which still provides an acceptable signal quality This compensates for reduced signal strength due to multi path slight antenna movement or changing atmospheric conditions CalAmp recommends a 20 dB fade margin for most projects The following table shows the RSSI versus Reliability Table 13 RSSI Reliability RSSI Reliability 100 dBm Approximately 50 reliability Fading may cause frequent data loss 90 dBm Approximately 90 reliability Fading will cause occasional data loss 80 dBm Approximately 99 reliability Reasonable tolerance to most fading 70 dBm Approximately 99 9 reliability with high tolerance to fading 2 8 RADIO INTERFERENCE Interference is possible in any radio system However since the Viper is designed for use in a licensed system interference is less likely because geographic location and existing operating frequencies are normally taken into account when allocating frequencies The risk of interference can be further reduced through prudent system design and configuration Allow adequate separation between frequencies and radio systems Keep the following points in mind when setting up your radio system 1 Systems installed in lightly populated areas are least likely to encounter interference while those in urban and suburban areas are more likely to be affected by other devices 2 Direc
66. will be sent on an alarm or notification condition to the server that has been added to the Trap IP List Each of these may be enabled or disabled Forward Power Forward power exceeds minimum or maximum levels The default setting is Disabled Reverse Power Power exceeds maximum reverse power The default setting is Disabled PA Power PA power has folded back The default setting is Disabled Save Click Save to save any changes you have made to settings in this tab See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note If you enable or disable the SNMP agent or change the Local IP Address Read Community Read Write Community or Trap Community password string or add or delete IP addresses in the Trap IP List in this tab as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A a reset of the Viper is required before any of these settings will take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 119 4 8 4 ONLINE DIAGNOSTICS Online Diagnostics is the fourth from left tab of the Diagnostics page To navigate to this tab select Diagnostics from the main menu and click Online Diagnostics Settings in this tab allow you to set the interval configure settings and save a report containing diagnostic information The transmission of online diagnostics may be enabled or disabled at any station or stations without affecting their ability t
67. 1 2 3 Echo Reply 4 5 6 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 176 BRIDGE MODE VLAN ENABLED Viper A Configuration Viper B Configuration Unit Status RF Status Basic Settings Unit Status RF Status Basic Settings Station Name _ ViperA Station Name _ ViperB Power Management Disable X Power Management Disable v Auto Reset D Enabled Disabled Auto Reset D Enabled Disabled Unit Reset Interval 1440 minutes minimum 10 minutes Unit Reset Interval 1440 minutes minimum 10 minutes o i e Temperature Setting Celsius Tempera Scie Celsius Fahrenheit Fahrenheit VLAN Mode4 9 Enabled Disabled VLAN Mode4 9 Enabled Disabled Management vVLAN Enabled Disabled Management VLAN4S Enabled Disabled Management VLAN ID 1 1 4094 Management VLAN ID 1 1 4094 Save Cancel Save Cancel Broadcast VLAN Ethernet PHY LAN Settings so HCP SNTP VLAN Ethernet PHY Multicast LAN Broadcast cng DH Bie z Settings Multicast LAN Settings Mode Untagged Tagged Port VLANID4 100 PVID 1 4094 Member Of Management E Mode Untagged Tagged Port VLANID4 100 PVID 1 4094 Member Of Management VLAN Enabled Disabled J Enabled Disabled Advanced Settings 2Show 9 Hide Advanced Settings Show 9 Hide Save Cancel RF Network R R
68. 1 10 W Dual RF Ports e 140 5048 400 UHF Range 3 406 1125 470 000 MHz 6 25 50 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W e 140 5048 401 UHF Range 3 406 1125 470 000 MHz 6 25 50 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W Dual RF Ports e 140 5048 600 UHF Range 5 450 000 511 975 MHz 6 25 50 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W e 140 5048 601 UHF Range 5 450 000 511 975 MHz 6 25 50 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W Dual RF Ports Note t is the user s responsibility of the user to check his or her FCC license or applicable regulatory agency for the country or geographical area in which the Viper will be operated to determine the correct parameters and settings for the channel frequencies power level and bandwidth Selecting a frequency range or transmit power that is out of compliance in the country where used could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Transmitter The Viper radio transmitter can be enabled or disabled The factory default setting is Disabled to disable the radio transmitter until the Viper is minimally configured Until the Setup Wizard is successfully completed Channel Number When the Viper Transmitter is Enabled you may select a channel number The number of channels available for selection depends on Frequency Range and Bandwidth Viper supports up to 32 different frequency channel pairs Tx Frequency MHz RX Frequency MHz and Tx Power The Viper can operate in simplex same Tx and Rx frequency or half duplex Tx and Rx frequencies are di
69. 2 PACKAGE CONTROL Package Control is the second middle tab of the Device Maintenance page To navigate to this tab select Device Maintenance from the main navigation menu and click Package Control From this tab you can view information about installed firmware for the Modem and Radio and upgrade the Radio Firmware if necessary Package control is used for verifying a field upgrade of the Viper radio modem firmware If the installation was successful the web page will display PASS If the installation is incomplete or some files are corrupt the web page will display FAIL and will give an error message specifying which files are missing or corrupt If an upgrade problem arises and persists click the Package Control once more and have the resulting messages available when contacting CalAmp technical support Figure 76 Device Management Package Control Device Maintenance DATARADIO Viper HW PCB 280 034 70 CodeBase ipr 3 6 R201307162030 Radio Firmware Version FIRM 05 10 R Modem Firmware Version Radio Firmware Upgrade 200 Package Name distrib pkg 200 Minor 6 00 Major 3 00 Package distrib pkg is valid Result PASS More information about using the Package Control tab for upgrading firmware is provided in Chapter 7 Upgrading Firmware which follows 4 9 3 WING COMMANDER Wing Commander is the third right most tab of the Device Maintenance page To navigate to this tab select Device Maintenance from the main
70. 2 text characters or 64 hexadecimal digits Hexadecimal digits include O through 9 and a through f or A through F Master Key A key that must be the same for a VPN server and all of its clients This key can be entered as a text string weaker or as a binary number stronger Atext string may contain any character For example a 16 byte string quotes are optional Anumeric value should start with Ox zero x to permit hexadecimal digits For example 0x00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff is a 16 byte 128 bit value A numeric value provides a stronger key since each string character contains only 7 bits but two hexadecimal digits contain 8 bits Notes The length of the key must match the Key Strength setting in bytes strength in bytes divided by 8 The VPN service cannot be enabled if this field is not set Clear VPN Password and Master Key Clears the VPN password used to gain access to VPN configuration settings Also clears the VPN password used t gain access to VPN configuration settings Also clears the VPN Master Key Note To reset just the Master Key set the Key Strength to a different value Set Server Client Defaults Sets most VPN settings to appropriate values for either server or client mode of operation Server mode should be selected on devices connected by Ethernet to the backhaul network Client mode should be selected on all other devices Notes The VPN Password Key Strength and Master K
71. 215 240 MHz Viper SC 215 240 MHz 6 25 100 kHz BW 2RFP 140 5128 504 215 240 MHz Viper SC Std BS 215 240 MHz 6 25 100 kHz BW Key to abbreviations BW bandwidth BS Base Station Std standard Rdnt redundant 2RFP Dual RF Port Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 6 Viper SC 400 Series Range 3 Model Number Frequency Range Description 140 5048 302 406 1 470 MHz Viper SC 406 1 470 MHz 6 25 50 kHz BW 140 5048 303 406 1 470 MHz Viper SC 406 1 470 MHz 6 25 50 kHz BW 2RFP 140 5148 302 406 1 470 MHz Viper SC Std BS 406 1 470 MHz 6 25 50 kHz BW Viper SC 400 Series Range 5 Model Number Frequency Range Description Viper SC 900 Series Range 3 Model Number Frequency Range Description Viper SC 900 Series Range 5 Model Number Frequency Range Description Key to abbreviations BW bandwidth BS Base Station Std standard Rdnt redundant 2RFP Dual RF Port Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 7 Table 7 Viper SC EN 300 113 ETSI Compliant and AS NZ Compliant Radio and Kit Part Numbers Viper SC 100 Series 142 174 MHz Model Number Frequency Range Description 140 5018 600 142 174 MHz Viper SC 142 174 MHz 12 5 25 kHz BW ETSI AS NZ 140 5018 601 142 174 MHz Viper SC 142 174 MHz 12 5 25 kHz BW ETSI AS NZ 2RFP 140 5118 601 142 174 MHz Viper SC Std BS 136 174 MHz 12 5 25 kHz BW ETSI AS NZ 2RF
72. 3 uses ips s 83u BGYiD 6 emus mp 4 3234 aom Ld d LLL este aws s 850m som s uses xps s Boeke sorm Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 150 FCC Emission Designators Viper SC 900 FCC IC Type Acceptance 6 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 25 0 kHz 100 kHz Model Number Channel Channel Data Rate Baud Rate OCBW Emission Designator type Bandwidth E Viper SC 900 SC 900 Viper SC 900 FCC IC Type Acceptance 6 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 25 0 kHz 50 0 kHz 100 kHz Model Number Channel Channel Data Rate Baud Rate OCBW Emission Designator m Bandwidth 140 5098 304 6 25 625kHz A4kbps A4kbps 3 30 3 30kHz 83X890D 6 emn mp 4 s aom Ld d LLCLLLCLLC C s uses Hips s 850m som s uses xps s 80km sorm Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 151 FCC Emission Designators Viper SC 100 400 ETSI Type Acceptance 12 5 kHz 25 0 kHz Model Number Channel Channel Data Rate Baud Rate OCBW Emission Designator type Bandwidth kHz 140 5018 600 16 125kHz 8kbps 8 630kHz 6K30F1D 140 5018 601 12 5 kHz 16kbps 8 6 10kHz 6K10F1D Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 152 APPENDIX D VIPER SC SITE INSTALLATION AND SETUP GENERAL GUIDELINES This appendix addresses best practices instructions for installi
73. 4 4 9 1 CONTE COMED Ol ER ERR uU UU E Uenled eatubhanalay ed teceussetaeuiMadstceusansGusseds eeasier 124 4 9 2 Package COMMUN actemdisiet aet apto eov scu tu cecal wsuceess vaca ve reactance ee 126 4 9 3 Wine Commande scares divenne ded Wood t qud d E tip qu ree qa DU RU paul MS NOU B pe sU RU IN UNE 126 Ds Network Optimization as ssec iv divortio te eed etie diet aede eee vtri eres ae ug ves a de Qu Ru 130 5L iMaximizing TCP IP TREOUBHDU ssi e tarte biet pads ba reor vta hood tsbves De b en viu E Un AN 130 5 2 Maximizing Throughput with a Weak RF LINK ccccccsssscccesseccceescecceeecsaeusceseuecesseuscessaeeeseuecessenecesseseesaaees 130 5 2 1 Use Router Mode with RF Acknowledgements Enabled lesen enne 130 5 2 2 Reduce RF Network BIt Rate e ir RE Futur ni i hat e ei e nies e ev 130 5 2 3 SUBE EDUC I TERRAE 131 5 2 4 Use Collision AV OIG SING Cael pisos So vut iuhe vv otio dir tate eo D e ue avant guesses 131 6 Using CalAmp Provided and Cloned Viper Configurations cccccsccccssscecesseeeceneceeeeeceseeeeeeeees 132 6 1 Using CalAmp Pre Provided Canned Configurations ccccccccsssssseeecccceeeeessecccceeesuesesececeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeauangeeeess 132 6 2 lonis d VID EM scsstaesitEssptites E usa t duis aneeraced tue sense boi surda pa vP serai dedu ce ou repe eus 133 7 NOE FACING PILIS cusiedc iti iaaeecukos dna E I bon tacui dues ed dua a Mascus eb cupi M es UU REED xU e LM ERU 134 YA T
74. 5 255 240 14 10 200 1 160 259 255 255 240 14 10 200 1 176 255 255 255 240 14 4 10 200 1 113 to 10 200 1 126 10 200 1 129 to 10 200 1 142 10 200 1 145 to 10 200 1 158 10 200 1 161 to 10 200 1 174 10 200 1 177 to 10 200 1 190 n 10 200 1 127 10 200 1 143 10 200 1 159 10 200 1 175 10 200 1 191 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 18 2 2 3 VIPER ROUTER GENERATOR VRG PROGRAM CalAmp has developed a Viper Route Generator VRG application that assists in generating the Viper s neighbor or router tables and also generates the configuration files for all the radios in your project within minutes Figure 12 Viper Route Generator tool NR Viper Route Generator File Edit Help 2 d IP setup and summary IP and Route Generator sse Refresh IP summary Ic m nitIP NAT Same verl 3_buildO_rev2 Net Fluss offset on IP Size FirstlP address Last IP address Mask System Configuration Eth IP Master Nets in4380 7 5 104385 27 How many Units totally planned 10 Generate Unit hrst Master Unit 10 5380 B z E n n penis scit i including master and remotes first time Config Eth IP Remote Nets Iii Boos Ura 10 43 8 32 23 3 BEEN 9 E 10 43 8 35 E 0 43 8 33 29 How many Units at level 0 1 Clear All Level 0 are for masters Generated Units RF IP Net E 172 16 0 0 24 1 10 E 72 16 0 1 1 72 16 0 10 24 Units at other levels 9 Add Unit RF MAC Base use Hex 10 00 00
75. 5 watt max zc uU u Note It is important to use attenuation between all demo units in the test network to reduce the amount of signal strength in the test environment 3 2 MEASURE PRIMARY POWER Primary power for the Viper SC must be within 10 30 VDC and must be capable of providing a minimum of e 10 W supply for Tx at 1 W e 40 W supply for Tx at 5 W or e 60 W supply for Tx at 10 W Viper SC Demo kits include a power supply with spring terminals Observe proper polarity when connecting the cables to the power supply The white wire must be connected to the red wire or B supply See the following figure 3 3 CONNECT THE VIPER SC TO PROGRAMMING PC Connect an Ethernet cable into the LAN port of the Viper SC and plug the other end into the Ethernet port of your PC Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 28 Figure 17 Viper SC cable connections TNC Female Power Connector Jai Viper SC 900 BLACK Negative ANT RED 10 30 VDC Positive E e e TE RJ 45 ne see WHITE Enable COM cable to connect Viper to PC Serial Ports Note Connect WHITE to RED Positive Lead Power Supply 3 4 LAN CONFIGURATION The Viper SC contains a DHCP server which will automatically assign an IP address to your computer however in some cases it may be necessary to change the network settings on your compute
76. 5008 000 Rev A Page 157 POWER SAVE MODE FAQS gt Q gt Q Is PSM currently available in the Viper product line Yes PSM has been supported since the version 3 4 firmware release and all units leaving the factory have version 3 4 or newer firmware installed Can put PSM into a Viper that is not an SC or SC No The Viper must have the Viper SC or Viper SC designation to have PSM Where can obtain firmware at the most current version for my Viper SC and for Viper SC units already implemented in the field Firmware updates are available through DeviceOutlook and posted on the CalAmp website www calamp com For assistance with downloading or installing firmware upgrades contact CalAmp technical support by e mail at productsupport calamp com or by phone at 1 507 833 6701 choose Option 2 for Fixed narrowband and radio modem products Can I use my RTU PLC to control PSM Yes A possible scenario might be for the remote PLC to activate the Enable line of the power connector wait a few seconds and then send and receive data Once the response or poll is completed it places the Viper back into sleep mode by removing B from the White wire Can I have the Viper SC listen for RF carrier to wake up the radio No In this case the remote Viper will not wake up since the Viper radio is asleep and does not listen to incoming RF messages The Ignition Sense line must be toggled from Off to B to wake up the radio Are the
77. 55 255 0 Network ID 172 20 0 0 Broadcast Address 172 20 255 255 Viper 1 172 20 0 1 16 PLC RTU 1 172 20 255 1 16 Viper 2 172 20 0 2 16 PLC RTU 2 172 20 255 2 16 Viper 3 172 20 0 3 16 PLC RTU 3 172 20 255 3 16 Viper 105 172 20 0 015 16 PLC RTU 250 172 20 255 250 16 Computer 1 172 20 138 1 16 Computer 500 172 20 255 254 16 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 15 Figure 8 Bridge Mode Example 2 PLC 2 fe ae aa AN PLC 3 172 20 255 2 Ronse 172 20 255 3 ey Viper 3 Viper 2 172 20 0 3 1 2 20 0 2 PLC PLC 100 ib c LA 172 20 255 100 Viper 1 Ef cfr 0172 20 01 ti Viper 105 Ban 2 172 20 0 105 172 20 138 1 HMI Computer 500 172 20 255 254 PLC 4 172 20 255 4 Viper 4 172 20 0 4 Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Network ID 172 20 0 0 Broadcast Address 172 20 255 255 2 2 2 ROUTER MODE Router mode allows greater network configuration flexibility allows the use of a variety of protocols and also adds RF diagnostics capability to Viper networks Diagnostics can be retrieved through the Ethernet port of the Viper More information about Viper RF diagnostics is provided in section 4 8 Diagnostics Router mode requires the setup of Ethernet IP and Serial IP addresses and is recommended only for users who have IT Network support readily available to them and or the authorization required to make changes in to the network In Router mode each Viper
78. 5F1D 12 5 kHz 8 kbps 08 8 20 kHz 8K20F1D 12 5 kHz 16 kbps 08 8 30 kHz 8K30F1D 25 0 kHz 16 kbps 16 5 kHz 16K5F1D 25 0 kHz 32 kbps 16 8 kHz 16K8F1D IE A 6 25 kHz 12 kbps 3 20 kHz 3K20F1D 6 25 kHz 16 kbps 3 45 kHz 3K45F1D amc owe 12 5 kHz 24 kbps 08 8 50 kHz 8K50F1D uu 12 5 kHz 32 kbps 08 8 08 kHz 8KO8F1D 25 0 kHz 48 kbps 17 8 kHz 17K8F1D 25 0 kHz 64 kbps 17 0 kHz 17KOF1D 50 0 kHz 32 kbps 29 8 kHz 29K8F1D 50 0 kHz 64 kbps 30 0 kHz 30KOF1D 50 0 kHz 96 kbps 29 5 kHz 29K5F1D 50 0kHz 128 kbps 30 5 kHz 30K5F1D Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 149 FCC Emission Designators Viper SC 200 IC Type Acceptance 12 5 kHz Model Number Channel Channel Data Rate Baud Rate OCBW Emission Designator type Bandwidth kHz s usus zke 8 esoke somo s muss s2 8 Boeke somo Viper SC 900 IC Type Acceptance 12 5 kHz 25 0 kHz 50 0 kHz Model Number Channel Channel Data Rate Baud Rate OCBW Emission Designator det e Bandwidth kHz 140 5098 502 125kHz 8kbps 8 820kHz 11K2FID 3 uses w p 8 lasow MORD 3 uses sus s soe OH Viper SC 900 SC 900 FCC IC Type Acceptance 6 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 25 0 kHz 100 kHz PME Number Channel Channel Data Rate Baud Rate OCBW Emission Designator mim Bandwidth a 140 5028 504 6 25 625kHz 4kbps 4kbps 3 30 3 30kHz 83X80HD 1 usi sem e amw Sam
79. 8 205 255 Viper 1 192 168 205 1 24 Viper 2 192 168 205 2 24 PLC RTU 1 192 168 205 10 24 PLC RTU 2 192 168 205 20 24 Computer 1 192 168 205 100 24 Viper 3 192 168 205 3 24 Viper 4 192 168 205 4 24 PLC RTU 3 192 168 205 30 24 PLC RTU 4 192 168 205 40 24 Viper 100 192 168 205 253 24 PLC RTU 4100 192 168 205 254 24 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 14 Figure 7 Bridge Mode Example 1 PLC 2 192 168 205 20 ioni 192 168 205 3 192 168 205 2 PLC 192 168 205 10 ay d PLC 3 Mz NS 192 168 205 30 pea Viper 3 ey Viper 1 PLC 100 Au wah PaL d milis 1 iati 205 1 192 168 205 254 I Viper 100 HMI a BJ 192 168 205 253 192 168 205 100 PLC 4 192 168 205 40 ERR Viper Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 g 192 168 205 4 Network ID 192 168 205 0 Broadcast Address 192 168 205 255 Bridge Mode Example 2 The subnet for this Viper network is comprised of devices with IP addresses ranging from 172 20 0 0 to 172 20 255 255 The subnet mask is 255 255 0 0 The shorthand notation is 172 20 0 1 16 since the subnet mask 255 255 0 0 contains 16 ones followed by 16 zeros when converted to binary e The first address 172 20 0 0 is reserved for the Network ID e The last address 172 20 255 255 is reserved for the broadcast address e There are 65534 valid IP addresses available to be assigned to hosts on the network Ethernet Subnet Mask 255 2
80. 8 5 RADIO LOG Radio Log is the fifth right most tab of the Diagnostics page To navigate to this tab select Diagnostics from the main menu and click Radio Log This tab allows you to generate a radio log and save it as a text file Figure 74 Diagnostics Radio Log Di Interface Remote SNMP Online Radio lagnosucs Statistics Statistics Diagnostics Log Click to generate radio log This may take several seconds Generate Aadio Log File Right click and Save As the link to save the radio log file RadioLog txt When Generate Radio Log File is clicked the unit will execute a special script which gathers diagnostic and log information This information is written to the Radio Log text file named RadioLog txt This procedure takes several seconds When the procedure is complete you may then extract the Radio Log text file by right clicking the RadioLog txt link provided near the bottom of the tab and selecting Save As to navigate to a directory on your PC The RadioLog txt file is an advanced diagnostic tool that should be sent to CalAmp s technical support for further analysis Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 123 4 9 DEVICE MAINTENANCE The Device Maintenance page contains three tabs Config Control Package Control and Wing Commander 4 9 1 CONFIG CONTROL Config Control is the first left most tab of the Device Maintenance page To navigate to t
81. 93030 1 805 987 9000 or 1 507 833 6701 Option 2 for Fixed narrowband and radio modem products E mail productsupport calamp com Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 194 WARRANTY STATEMENT CalAmp warrants to the original purchaser for use Buyer that data telemetry products manufactured by CalAmp Products are free from defects in material and workmanship and will conform to published technical specifications for a period of except as noted below one 1 year from the date of shipment to Buyer CalAmp makes no warranty with respect to any equipment not manufactured by CalAmp and any such equipment shall carry the original equipment manufacturer s warranty only CalAmp further makes no warranty as to and specifically disclaims liability for availability range coverage grade of service or operation of the repeater system provided by the carrier or repeater operator Any return shipping charges for third party equipment to their respective repair facilities are chargeable and will be passed on to the Buyer If any Product fails to meet the warranty set forth above during the applicable warranty period and is returned to a location designated by CalAmp CalAmp at its option shall either repair or replace such defective Product directly or through an authorized service agent within thirty 30 days of receipt of same No Products may be returned without prior authorization from CalAmp Any repaired
82. AN VLAN Virtual Local Area Network is the fifth from left tab of the RF Network Settings page To navigate to this tab select RF Network Settings from the main menu and click VLAN This tab allows you to make VLAN Configuration settings for the RF Network VLAN 802 1Q is operational in bridge mode only Router mode allows tagged mode only so the advanced options have fewer selections available for specifying behavior based on VLAN ID When the Viper is operating in bridge mode VLAN can be configured to operate in tagged or untagged mode Figure 40 RF Network Settings VLAN with Advanced Settings hidden RF Network RF Settings Network Port vtAN D _ PVID 1 4094 Member Of Management VLAN Enabled Disabled Advanced Settings Show Hide Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked PN you will need to reset the unit for them to take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 64 Mode The RF interface operates in VLAN Tagged mode only In Untagged mode devices on this interface are not using VLAN tags Incoming ingress packets are tagged with the port VLAN ID PVID VLAN tags are removed on outgoing egress packets See the Advanced Settings section that follows for more options Port VLAN ID Sets the Port VLAN ID PVID Member of Management VLAN When the Management VLAN is enabled you can access the internal functions of the Viper HTTP FTP
83. Again all Viper SCx MIB objects can be accessed through an MIB browser Figure 98 Viper OID Tree Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 170 APPENDIX H VLAN INTRODUCTION When VLAN is enabled the Viper can perform certain actions based on the interface configuration and the content of packets VLAN identifiers or tags Actions the Viper can perform include adding or removing or replacing VLAN tags and filtering or not filtering packets based on their VLAN tag VLAN TAGGING AND UNTAGGING Adding a VLAN header to an Ethernet packet is called tagging and removing a VLAN header from an Ethernet packet is called untagging Packets with a VLAN header can be recognized by looking at the Ethernet type field Some common Ethernet types 0x0800 Ethernet data is an IP packet 0x0806 Ethernet data 1S an ARP packet 0x8100 Ethernet data is preceded by a VLAN header VLAN TAGGING Reception of an untagged Ethernet packet An untagged Ethernet packet is structured like the following MAC DST MAC SRC TYPE 00800 IP PACKET Adding a VLAN header to an untagged Ethernet packet The VLAN Header is added following the Ethernet Header and before the Ethernet data as indicated highlighted in beige in the following figure MAC DST MAC SRC TYPE 028100 PRIO 0 CFI D ID 100 IP PACKET Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 171 VLAN UN
84. C doing many keep alives or on air network being contentious it may be required to use router mode Router mode allows retransmission of messages lost due to on air contention Bridge mode only does broadcasts without retries In Bridge mode the application needs to retry lost messages FILTERING TCP KEEP ALIVE WITH VIPER TCP PROXY MODE When using TCP protocol and having PLCs where the TCP keep alive rate cannot be controlled it is important to enable Viper TCP OIP proxy mode This requires that all Vipers are configured in router mode Viper Bridge mode cannot filter keepalive and cannot operate in TCP proxy mode Note For PLCs where the keep alive can be controlled and are required set keep alive to 4 minutes One of the Viper s TCP proxy mode usages allows filtering of keep alive messages and prevents them to be sent over the air Without this filtering several PLCs sending keep alive messages could easily load the on air network If TCP Proxy mode is not enabled see documentation earlier in this user manual about using the Viper Web interface to enable it By default Viper proxy mode is enabled See the RF Network Settings RF Bandwidth Management tab Also see RF Network Settings Neighbor Table Connectivity Status to make sure that neighbors are configured with the proxy attribute REPLACING OR RESETTING A VIPER USING PROXY MODE WITHOUT RESTARTING POLLING When replacing or resetting a remote Viper a Viper used as a repeate
85. Eth 192 168 205 2 Eth 172 31 5 2 Viper 1 NAT Enabled Eth Private Viper 2 NAT Disabled Port 2000 translate to Port 23 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 167 APPENDIX G MIB FILE OVERVIEW Note The SNMP feature and the SNMP tab shown below is only available when the appropriate feature key is installed in the Viper Contact CalAmp for information about obtaining and installing the SNMP feature When the SNMP feature key is installed three MIB files are bundled with the Viper s firmware In the Diagnostics SNMP tab click the Download mibs zip link to download a zip file that contains the three MIB files These files contain links to the SNMP information available in the Viper The MIB files must be loaded into a third party MIB browser Figure 96 Viper SNMP tab with Download mibs zip link s Interface Remote Onlin Diagnostics 7 SNMP Statistics Statistics 2 Enabled SNMP AGENT Disabled Local IP Address Automatic Read Community LLLE E Read Write Community ALLEE E Trap Community d eee0006 O Adds a b c d Delete Trap IP List Empty MIB Download mibs zip Forward Power Enabled Disabled Reverse Power Enabled Disabled PA Power Enabled Disabled Save Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked Ay you will need to reset the unit for them te take effect Caution Certain MIB browsers standalone or in
86. Ethernet IEEE standard network protocol that specifies how data is placed on and retrieved from a common transmission medium Firewall A set of related programs located at a network gateway server that protects the resources of a network from users on other networks Firmware The embedded programming code running a network device Fragmentation Breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium that cannot support the original size of the packet FTP File Transfer Protocol A protocol used to transfer files over a TCP IP network Gateway A device interconnecting networks with different incompatible communications protocols HDX Half Duplex Data transmission occurring in two directions over a single line using separate Tx and Rx frequencies but only in one direction at a time HMI Human Machine Interface Button panel keyboard or touch screen equipped device that provides a means of human interaction in controlling devices HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol Communications protocol used to connect to servers on the World Wide Web IPconfig Internet Protocol Configuration A console application available in Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X that displays all current TCP IP network configuration values Displays the IP address for a particular networking device LAN Local Area Network Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 136 MAC Media Access Cont
87. F Bandwidth Ne yor Globa MS RF Network RF Bandwidth Neighbor Settings letwork Management Table Settings E stics Settings Network Manag nt Table Mode Tagged Port VLANID4 100 PVID 1 4094 Member Of Management VLAN Mode Tagged Port VLANID4 100 PVID 1 4094 Member Of Management VLAN J Enabled Disabled J Enabled Disabled Advanced Settings Show 9 Hide Advanced Settings Show 9 Hide Save Cancel Save Cancel Eth A RF Eth B Viper B 4 4 Host B Host A i n vlan enable 1 vlan eth mode tagged 5 192 168 1 2 24 192 168 1 1 24 vlan eth pvid 100 vlan rf mode tagged vlan rf m vlan rf pvid 100 vlan rf pvid 100 192 168 1 254 24 192 168 1 253 24 VLAN ID 100 Example Host A C V ping 192 168 1 2 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 177 Eth A RF Eth B Echo Request roam pmo cna maoo wer aon maeman mos cna maoa 4 rouen moscnena merwasa 6 o oo ooo emen moo cromo nee wamo 6 TIT ROUTER MODE VLAN does not apply in router mode on the Viper The Ethernet header is removed from the data packet when it passes over the RF medium Eth A RF Eth B Viper A Viper B Host A Host B 192 168 1 1 24 ETH 192 168 1 254 24 EH 192 168 2 254 24 192 168 2 1 24 RF 10 1 1 1 8 RF 10 1 1 2 8 Example Host A C V ping 192 168 1 2 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed S
88. Frequency and Transmit Frequency in megahertz and Transmit power in Watts Figure 22 Viper Setup Wizard Step 3 Viper Setup Wizard The radio channel must be properly set up for this station to communicate with its neighbors Bandwidth KHz Data And Control Packet 32 Bit Rate Kbps RX Frequency MHz 944 Range 926 000000 960 000000 TX Frequency MHz i4 Range 928 000000 960 000000 TX Power Watts 8 Default 5 0 Range 1 0 8 0 Hote The db symbol indicates that this parameter will require a Reset before it takes effect Viper Setup Wizard The radio channel must be properly set up for this station to communicate with its neighbors Bandwidth KHz Data Packet Bit Rate Kbps Control Packet Bit Rate Kbps RX Frequency MHz Range 215 000000 240 000000 TX Frequency MHz Range 215 000000 240 000000 TX Power Watts Default 5 0 Range 1 0 10 0 Hote The symbol indicates that this parameter will require a Reset before it takes effect Default settings for this page vary by Viper model and organization that determines compliance for the country or geographical area in which it is operated These factors typically determine available frequency range bandwidth and transmit power Refer to RF Exposure Compliance Requirements and the frequency range specified for the model number in the General Specifications Selecting a frequency range or transmit power that is out of compliance in the count
89. Ingress and egress packets on an interface operating in Tagged mode will typically be updated using the following rules available in the VLAN tab for the interface in the Viper Web interface Packet Packet Packet Tag Unchanged With PVID With PvID L a I a VID PVID VID is in Table VID zPVID VID is not in Table Egress Packet Untagged VID 0 VID PVID VIDI PVID VID is in Table VID PVID VID is not in Table VID is the VLAN ID contained in the packet PVID is the Port VLAN ID the VLAN ID associated with the interface and configured through the Web browser The Viper Web interface allows you to configure a VLAN Member table to help handle packets with VLAN IDs different than the VLAN ID associated with the interface Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 173 VLAN MEMBER TABLE The VLAN member table is used for interfaces operating in Tagged mode onlly It is used to select the behavior of the Viper when it processes packets with VLAN IDs that are different from the interface VLAN ID PVID Silently Keep Retag Tag Delete op Packet Packet Packet Taq Packet Unchanged With PVID With PVID Ingress Packet Untagged a VID QO VID PVID a VIDI PVID VID is in Table a VID I PVID VID is not in Table Egress Packet Untagged VID 0 VID PVID VID PVID VID is in Table VID zPVID VID is not in Table Save Cancel Add VLAN ID To Table 1 1 4094 Delete VLAN ID From Tab
90. M Port Interface EIA 232F DCE Data Rate Setup Port 300 115 200 bps Default 19 2 kbps 100 kHz capable models Setup Port 300 19 200 bps Default 19 2 kbps other models COM Port 300 115 200 bps Default 9 6 kbps DIEM 5 Tri color status LEDs Power Status Activity Link Rx Tx Diagnostics Message elements Forward amp Reverse Power Temperature Voltage QoS dropped packets Tx amp Rx Total Packets Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 143 VIPER SC OVERALL DIMENSIONS AND MOUNTING HOLE LOCATIONS The following figure shows the overall dimensions of the Viper SC IP router with mounting plate and locations of mounting holes The mounting plate allows the Viper to be secured to any surface that can be drilled for this purpose This drawing may be used for layout reference but it is advised that an actual physical comparison be made using the Viper and mounting plate before laying out and drilling mounting holes Figure 80 Viper SC Chassis and Mounting Plate Overall Dimensions and Mounting Hole Locations 6 50 in 5 75 in 2 M I RN QUUM JI i a iilii i i i gii Ii illi i i ly 1 4 74 in H m 0 210 in x 4 mounting holes Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 144 APPENDIX C VIPER SC REGULATORY CERTIFICATIONS Domestic and International Cer
91. Mask is 255 255 255 0 The Default Gateway is 0 0 0 0 There are several important considerations to be aware of for these settings in addition to the explanation on the page Each Viper should be configured with a unique IP address If you are in the habit of taking the default settings on each page they will all have the same address of 192 168 205 1 The Network Mask determines whether units are configured to be on the same subnet If the subnet has a Default Gateway its IP address should be entered in the field provided Note Once you have changed the IP Address and applied the setting and after you have reset the Viper to make it take effect you will need to enter this new IP address in your browser Address Bar to access the web interface of the Viper When finished click Apply to save any settings you have made in this page and then click Next to proceed to Step 3 on the following page Note If you change the IP Address and the Viper is reset you will need to change the IP Address in your browser s Address bar to this address and enter your user name and password to access this Viper Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 36 3 7 3 SETUP WIZARD STEP 3 RADIO SETUP The page for Step 3 of the Viper Setup Wizard allows you to set basic radio parameters for the Viper Settings include the radio bandwidth in kilohertz Data And Control Packet Bit Rate in kilobits per second or kbps Receive
92. P 140 5318 600 142 174 MHz Viper SC Rdnt BS 142 174 MHz 12 5 25 kHz BW ETSI AS NZ 140 5318 601 142 174 MHz Viper SC Rdnt BS 142 174 MHz 12 5 25 kHz BW ETSI AS NZ 2RFP Viper SC 400 Series Range 3 140 5118 600 142 174 MHz Viper SC Std BS 136 174 MHz 12 5 25 kHz BW ETSI AS NZ Model Number Frequency Range Description 140 5348 401 406 1 470 MHz Viper SC Rdnt BS 406 1 470 MHz 12 5 25 kHz BW ETSI AS NZ 2RFP Viper SC 400 Series Range 5 Model Number Frequency Range Description Key to abbreviations BW bandwidth BS Base Station Std Standard Rdnt Redundant 2RFP Dual RF Port 1 4 2 FAN KITS AND CABLES The following tables list standard fan kits and cables available for use with the Viper SC Table 8 Viper SC Fan Kits Description Part Number Fan Kit Viper SC Factory Installed 150 5008 001 Fan Kit Viper SC Field Installed 150 5008 002 Table 9 Viper SC Power Cable Description Part Number Power Cable Viper SC 897 5008 010 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 8 Table 10 Coaxial Adapter Cables Length Connectors Type Part Number 18 inches TNC Male to N Male RG 400 140 5018 502 72 inches TNC Male to N Male RG 400 250 5018 502 48 inches TNC Male to N Male RG 400 140 5018 503 18 inches TNC Male to N Female RG 400 140 5118 502 1 5 COMPONENTS 1 5 1 BASIC UNIT The following items are included with the Vipe
93. Pin 3 5 mm Power Header Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 141 CalAmp P N 897 5008 010 Weidm ller P N 1639260000 4 Pin 3 5 mm Power Plug Cable 60 inches Connections Fan Output Ground Power Enable Modem Logic Model 625kHz 125kHz 25kHz 50kHz 100 kHz Viper 100 140 5018 500 obsolete 140 5018 501 obsolete Viper Viper 400 4 kbps 8 kbps 16 kbps 140 5048 300 obsolete 8 kbps 16 kbps 32 kbps 140 5048 301 obsolete 140 5048 500 obsolete 140 5048 501 obsolete Viper 900 8 kbps 16 kbps 140 5098 500 obsolete 140 5098 501 obsolete Viper SC 100 140 5018 502 140 5018 503 Viper SC 200 140 5028 502 140 5028 503 Viper SC Viper SC 400 140 5048 302 140 5048 303 140 5048 502 140 5048 503 Viper SC 900 140 5098 502 140 5098 503 Viper SC Viper SC ETSI Viper SC 200 140 5028 504 140 5028 505 Viper SC 900 140 5098 304 140 5098 305 140 5098 504 140 5098 505 Viper SC 100 ETSI AS NZ 140 5018 600 140 5018 601 Viper SC 400 ETSI AS NZ 140 5048 400 140 5048 401 140 5048 600 140 5048 601 128 kbps 64 kbps 96 kbps 128 kbps 32 kbps 64 kbps 96 kbps 128 kbps 32 kbps 64 kbps 96 kbps 128 kbps 128 kbps 192 kbps 256 kbps 64 kbps 128 kbps 192 kbps 256 kbps Modulation Type Addressing 2FSK AFSK 8FSK 16FSK Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 142 SETUP and CO
94. Power Management Using the Auto Reset menu in Home Basic Settings Home Unit Status RF Status Basic Settings Station Name Viper Remotel power Managemen eee wa Enabled Follow Ignition Sense Unit Reset Interval minutes minimum 10 minutes Celsius Fahrenheit VLAN Mode Enabled 9 Disabled Management VLANZS Enabled 9 Disabled Management VLAN id H 1 4094 Temperature Setting Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked dy you will need to reset the unit for them to take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 156 To set up the Viper SC to enable or disable PSM using the command line interface CLI use either of the following two commands set low power mode 0 disables PSM set low power mode 1 Cenables psm follows the state of the ignition sense signal Save when selecting either mode enter save to save your setting Selecting Power Management to Enable follow ignition sense as shown above allows the white Ignition Sense line to control the PSM of the Viper SC Normally the White ignition sense line or Enable line is tied to the B supply along with the Red B wire When used for PSM the white wire is connected to a line that will toggle from B to OFF When B is applied the Viper SC will be powered up as normal When B is removed the PSM sleep mode is enabled in less than 500 milliseconds 500 ms or 0 5 se
95. RF MAC First 10 00 07 Las 10 00 04 System Setting RF MAC follows RF IP sequence M Verify Nets with non public Nets v Master Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Unit ID 1 Level ID Name upd RF Mac 10 00 01 Unit ID 2 Level I ID Name RF Mac 10 00 02 Unt ID 7 Leva 2 ID Name Jpd RF Mac 10 00 07 p Next Hop p Net Hop Remote 7 Next Hop emus mre eer List Ul Remote o Ree Peer List 2 Remote eee Eth IP 04385 St C I Eth IP 10 43 8 35 LI I Mi Eth IP 1043 85 3 se RF IP 172 16 0 1 24 P RriP 1721602 ime 4 ms RriP 1721607 fag YR Unt ID 8 Level 2 ID Name RF Mac 10 00 08 er List Remote8 Next Hop Peer List 2 Remotes Next Ho Eth IP 10 43 8 83 lag Set RriP 1721608 24 Lup j Unit ID 3 Level fi ID Name RF Mac 10 00 03 Unz ID 9 Level 2 ID Name RF Mac 10 00 09 p c Nex Hop Peer Us Few E emus i dum NBor eux B NBor NBor eth ip 1043843 Set Eth IP 10 43 8 91 gl s ltI I RF IP EE a up RFIP 172 16 0 9 24 CHP Unit ID 4 Level i ID Name RF Mac 10 00 04 Unt ID 10 Level 2 ID Name RF Mac 10 00 0A p 1 Remotes Next Hop er List B Remote 10 Next Hop eer List Uo Perote m NBo Peer List B NBor NBor eth iP 1043 851 29 Set Eth IP 1043 8 99 29 Set i ee E arie 17216 04 24 un HL mri 21601 4 U Unt ID 5 Level ID Name Ww RF Mac 10 00 05 Upd Peer List Eh IP 10 43 8 59 j
96. RF Path ReguitemelibsmodsxomesudiutrUBdussmimEt bna karroce inana iia encase vnnsade se EN REED ure pE dimi a dE ei er 20 2 4 Site Selection and Site Survey cc ccccccessccccesececcesececeuececceececeuseceseueceesenecesaueeceseeecessuaeceseuecessenecessuneceseuecesseneeets 21 2 4 1 Sis SC sie do I NER E m 21 2 4 2 BMS aul H 21 2 5 Selecting Antenna and Lightning Arrestor combinations sees ns 21 2 5 1 Lightning Arrestor OVErvVieW ccscssesssssscnersscccessrencucssencueuseneusucucasscneuesseneusreacaserencucssencusueacansrencusssencusnses 21 2 9 2 Antenna OV SL VIEW cicavutactceutconsenencoanaie m 22 2 5 9 The Wrong COoImbilidtilODsssi mares evetal ses isinin ris dEaS mo duds ap E N Dese Quad rdv a E TNES 22 2 5 4 Good SSO PractiCES NN 23 2 6 Selecting Antenna arid FECA IMGs ccssis cicuisanannssaecanainccussactanausensdcesswateatsansecdneoudsamsacuakdensameseean canesutandtsersansscoansansaneseeal 23 2 6 1 PUDE d II situa s P teers ce ite asamp ae E IEIUNII ie alee ventana mace NI MR ee 24 2 6 2 TS SC qu NRI m 24 2 6 3 FUNG aparece ccc ats se saa ME RR enisened IHNEN IMMENSE KNSMMDOI MN Ud 25 2 6 4 RF Exposure Compliance Regul emensus etos reon ever aes e Sua Ub quuy EVE SE DEYEUR es Ux pesa db S auram a oU P M FUes b cp eYY eS Udl E reds 25 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A
97. RIRMAV Ware Wine ROG UCU OM EE mE 134 7 2 How The Viper Firmware IS UDBraded at ert EXER OH ERO INE res SEES CU ANENRE T exu Hs SR THERETO Ga e EUR EE Su V EAS Es Hs eS 134 7 2 1 Ubpsrade the Moden iW al Gc dei e viden eI ic mete etd aoi E abe cqE ES ecu M IRE 134 7 2 2 DUpsrade tlie Radio FIEFnWSEB Gee io oed E e oboe acne ea eevee oe 135 APPENDIX A Abbreviations and Definitions eese 136 APPENDIX B Viper SC Specifications wads cee sees ga os qu odia dao d acat oO up dead desc o p Sato aad ee PC uy tea Ede oto 139 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page v GENO Fal SORE IT IG ALOIS RPM E 139 Viper SC Overall Dimensions and Mounting Hole Locations cccccccccsssecccesecccsenecccaeesccseececseuecessueseessesesseneeess 144 APPENDIX C Viper SC Regulatory Certifications cccccccsssccccssecccesececeesceceeseeeseaeceseeeceesenees 145 Declaration Of Conformity For Models 140 5018 60x 140 5048 40x And 140 5048 60x eene 146 EU and EFTA Member States Acceptable Frequency Table cccccsccccccsssscccccesscceesaeecceseseesccesseaneccesssaaeeeessaaasees 147 APPENDIX D Viper SC Site Installation and Setup General Guidelines 153 PHYSICAL InstallatiOfi ismod e uti t e NH Eq RU I ede Mta o Mu td ved Mt edam Motus ut iu Moe e tM MEUM M EU ee 153 Viper Configuration Radio and Con
98. S Timeout RADIUS Retries Delay Between Retries Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked PN you wil need to reset the unit for them to take effect Command Shell HTTP Server and FTP Server Each of these services Command Shell HTTP Server and FTP Server can be set for one of three possible options Local RADIUS And Local or RADIUS Each of these options is explained below Local When accessing the service check the user credentials user name and password against credentials stored in the Viper The user will not be able to access the service if proper credentials are not provided RADIUS And Local When accessing the service check the user credentials user name and password against credentials stored in the Viper If the credentials fail to match credentials stored in the Viper check for a match against credentials stored in the RADIUS server database RADIUS When accessing the service check the user credentials user name and password against the RADIUS server database If the user credentials fail to pass with the RADIUS server access to the service is denied Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 104 Device Authentication When enabled Viper performs local and remote device authentication using a RADIUS server Set the VPN module of the Viper local to operate in server mode and set the VPN module of remote devices to operate in client mode The Viper will
99. SEQUENTIAL SPECIAL INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES WHETHER ON THE BASIS OF NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE The purpose of the exclusive remedies set forth above shall be to provide Buyer with repair or replacement of non complying Products in the manner provided above These exclusive remedies shall not be deemed to have failed of their essential purpose so long as CalAmp is willing and able to repair or replace non complying Products in the manner set forth above This warranty applies to all Products sold worldwide Some states do not allow limitations on implied warranties so the above limitations may not be applicable You may also have other rights which vary from state to state EXCEPTIONS THIRTY DAY Tuning and adjustment of telemetry radios NO WARRANTY Fuses lamps and other expendable parts Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 195 ABOUT CALAMP CalAmp NASDAQ CAMP is a proven leader in providing wireless communications solutions to a broad array of vertical market applications and customers CalAmp s extensive portfolio of intelligent communications devices robust and scalable cloud service platform and targeted software applications streamline otherwise complex machine to machine M2M deployments These solutions enable customers to optimize their operations by collecting monitoring and efficiently reporting business critical data and intelligence from high value remote assets Ca
100. Sa RF IP 16 up Unit ID 6 Level 1 ID Name Upd RF Mac 10 00 06 P st 1 Next Hop at OE En EE NBor NBor You should try to choose an IP addressing scheme so that the master Viper s address is always first in a sequence and then the remote IP addresses to follow in that sequence The VRG application can be downloaded from CalAmp Contact CalAmp Technical Support to obtain the VRG application and instructions for its use 2 2 4 MULTISPEED NETWORKING When using the Viper SC with a Viper SC multi speed base station it is possible to configure the network for multispeed operation With the base station enabled as the rate controller the remote device becomes a rate follower The rate controller base station can be configured to talk at different over the air data rates for each remote Viper This allows the user to uniquely control the data rate for each RF link in the system using the Base Station configuration interface web pages The user can program RF links with strong signal strength to communicate at fast data rates and RF links with low signal strength can be programmed to communicate at more robust slower data rates Even if data rates vary from Viper to Viper every Viper in the network must be programmed for the same bandwidth Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 19 An option to configure the Viper SC for m
101. TAGGING Reception of a tagged Ethernet packet The Viper may receive a tagged Ethernet packet structured like the following The VLAN header is highlighted MAC DST MAC SRC I PE 028100 Sate Bensa Juge IP PACKET Removing the VLAN header from the tagged Ethernet packet The Viper when configured to remove VLAN tags removes the VLAN header from the Ethernet packet and it becomes an untagged Ethernet packet MAC DST MAC SRC TYPE 020800 IP PACKET INTERFACE MODES When VLAN is enabled bridge mode only Viper interfaces can operate in one of two modes Untagged mode or Tagged mode The RF interface is limited to Tagged mode Each interface called a port is assigned a VLAN ID called a VLAN ID VID or Port VLAN ID PVID UNTAGGED MODE Ingress incoming and egress exiting packets on an interface operating in Untagged mode will typically be updated using the following rules available in the VLAN tab for the interface in the Viper Web Interface Retag Tag Delete Packet Packet Packet Tag Packet Unchanged With PVID With PVID Ingress Packet Untagged ax VID 0 cm VID PVID VID I PVID Egress Packet Untagged VID 0 VID PVID VID zPVID Save Cancel VID is the VLAN ID contained in the packet PVID is the Port VLAN ID the VLAN ID associated with the interface and configured through the Web browser Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 172 TAGGED MODE
102. TCP data packet to Host B Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 55 4 Viper A hears an RF acknowledgement from Viper B and generates a TCP ACK to send to Host A Host B receives the original TCP data packet and generates a TCP ACK to send back over the network 5 Viper B receives the TCP ACK but does not send it over the air saving bandwidth on the airlink Duplicate Packet Removal Enable or disable the duplicate packet removal algorithm The default is Disabled to preserve compatibility with older versions of the firmware This algorithm detects duplicate packets that might appear through the system because of retransmits Bridge Forwarding Selections for Bridge Forwarding are either Everything or IP and ARP types only The default setting is IP and ARP types Ethernet II types Ox0800 0x0806 only By selecting the Everything setting the Viper will forward all 802 3 Ethernet Il packet types Use this setting to transnport protocols such as IPX 802 1Q etc Note Bridge Forwarding is not available in Router mode because the Viper will automatically forward all packets according to its routing table When selecting Router forwarding mode all relevant IP settings must be configured In a Viper network a polling device may want to send a query to a remote device and wait for an amount of time for a response Failure to obtain a response will trigger the polling device to resend a query If the
103. VID you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag the packets with PVID or delete their tag The default for this setting which is for Untagged Port Mode only is to silently drop the packet VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID but VID is in Table Tagged Port Mode only If exiting packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID but is in the VLAN Member Table you can choose to silently drop these packets or keep them unchanged retag their packets or delete their tags The default for this setting which is for Tagged Port Mode only is to keep the packet unchanged Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 67 VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID and VID is not in Table Tagged Port Mode only If exiting packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID and is not in the VLAN Member Table you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged retag the packets or delete their tags The default for this setting which is for Tagged Port Mode only is to keep the packet unchanged Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab See the Note that follows Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Add VLAN ID To Table To add a VLAN ID enter the VLAN ID as a number between 1 and 4094 inclusive and then click this button The VLAN ID is added to the VLAN Member Table in t
104. abled Avoid use of reserved port number values For example 20 21 23 123 520 5002 Setting the value of TCP Keepalive to zero 0 disables the sending of keepalive packets Local IP Address The local IP address for IP Services The default setting is Automatic e Automatic The Viper will respond to either its RF or Ethernet IP e Ethernet The Viper will respond only to the Ethernet IP address e RF The Viper will respond only to the RF IP address TCP Keepalive TCP Client Server Mode REQUIRED Value Automatic Let the IP stack decide Ethernet IP address of the Ethernet interface RF IP address of the RF interface REQUIRED Value 1 65535 Do not use 20 21 23 123 520 or 5002 REQUIRED Value Unicast IP address based on Local IP selection for TCP reply message REQUIRED Value 1 65535 OPTIONAL Value 0 1440 minutes 0 TCP Keepalive is disabled Automatic Ethernet HF The TCP Keepalive feature will transmit a short Keepalive message to test the TCP connection if there is not data transferred through an open TCP connection after the specified number of minutes If the keepalive message is not received successfully the Viper will close the existing TCP connection Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 96 To disable this feature set the TCP keepalive to zero 0 With the TCP keepalive feature disa
105. age instruction basis as shown below this is with regards to the CIP connection which is only controlled by the Inactivity timeout Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 190 Table 19 Mnemonics and Data Types with Description for Allen Bradley Logix PLCs Mnemonic Data Description Type UnconnectedTimeout UINT Timeout for an unconnected message or for making a connection The default value is 30 seconds Unconnected The ER bit turns on if the controller doesn t receive a response within the UnconnectedTimeout time Connected The ER bit turns on if the controller doesn t get a response for making the connection within the UnconnectedTimeout time ConnectionRate UINT Timeout for a connected message once it has a connection This timeout is for the response from the other device about the sending of the data TimeoutMultiplier This timeout applies only after the connection is made The timeout ConnectionRate x TimeoutMultiplier The default ConnectionRate is 7 5 seconds The default TimeoutMultiplier is O which is a multiplication factor of 4 The default timeout for connected messages is 30 seconds 7 5 secondsx 4 30 seconds To change the timeout change the ConnectionRate and leave the TimeoutMultiplier at the default value For the Logix controllers the UnconnectedTimeout has to be individually adjusted in each message instruction tag The default is 30 000 000 micros
106. another PLC it would be good to have ladder logic protection in case of communication failure with remote For example one PLC is at the pump station and the other is at the tank station To avoid tank overflow in case of communication loss it could be possible to design the logic for the pump PLC to detect that if no data message were received for over 10 minutes from the tank PLC to turn its pumps off if they were running For example the remote PLC inactivity timeout could trigger this or some other method of detection Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 183 PLC LADDER LOGIC ON RESTART OPENS ALL CONNECTIONS AT ONCE INSTEAD OF SEQUENTIALLY When the PLC ladder program is set up to have at startup all write message rungs set to true all TCP connections are triggered simultaneously This creates an overload of TCP SYNs and somewhat could congest the on air traffic depending on the system It is recommended to setup the ladder write message rungs not to start up simultaneously Write messages should be setup to open the TCP connection sequentially For more information it may be required to contact your PLC provider VIPER GENERAL SETUP WITH PLCS SET UP VIPER IN ROUTER MODE INSTEAD OF BRIDGE MODE Note Viper Bridge Mode cannot filter keep alive and cannot operate in TCP proxy mode If the system has very few units and few messages Viper Bridge mode could be used But for larger systems and PL
107. are used to encrypt VPN tunnel traffic These keys are unique to each tunnel and are generated during VPN client server key exchange Tunnel keys are periodically updated to maximize security Server Status Advertisement By default traffic normally sent via VPN tunnel is blocked if one client server tunnel endpoint is non operational A server therefore advertises its status to ensure that all its tunnels have a very high availability These are sent whenever the server is enabled or disabled through a reset device hot swap or manual intervention VPN clients can thus quickly re establish their tunnels as needed Configuration Most VPN server configuration settings are sent to each client during key exchange AVPN server does not send the following settings to VPN clients e VPN login password and Master Key e Device specific General settings and IP filter settings Master Key The VPN Master Key is a configuration item essential to the security of VPN operations A VPN server s Master Key must also be set on each of its clients Access to the Master Key along with other VPN settings is therefore protected by the VPN login mechanism Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 107 A VPN deployment consisting of multiple isolated VPN servers can employ a different Master Key per server for additional security since redeploying VPN clients to other servers would require their Master Key to be changed to match
108. arted A VPN server automatically sets this parameter on its clients during key exchange Default 15 minutes Minimum 0 minutes disabled Maximum 60 minutes 1 hour Idle Probes Available on VPN servers only On Idle Timeout this sets the number of Idle Probes to send without receiving a reply An Idle Probe attempt consists of a 100 byte UDP packet that is sent and received via a VPN tunnel A successful send and receive prevents premature key exchange for that VPN tunnel Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 111 Notes The Idle Timeout setting must be non zero before Idle Probes are sent The retry frequency of each probe attempt is determined by the Network Latency setting For a Network Latency of 10 the probe frequency is 10 seconds Default 3 seconds Minimum 0 seconds disabled Maximum 10 seconds Key Timeout Available on VPN servers only Maximum duration of VPN tunnel cipher keys Key exchange consists of approximately twelve 12 80 100 byte TCP packets 1 kilobyte which may take several seconds or longer when the network is busy Notes The retry frequency of each key exchange attempt is determined by the Network Latency setting For a Network Latency of 10 the exchange attempt frequency is 0 70 seconds A VPN server automatically sets this parameter on its clients during key exchange Default 6 hours Minimum 1 hour Maximum 24 hours Network Latency Avai
109. as Tube Open When the voltage exceeds 600V the breakdown voltage for IS B50LN series PolyPhasers the gas discharge tube turns on and the antenna side of the DC blocking capacitor is immediately pulled from 600V to OV Since the lighting arrestor s capacitor was charged to 600V that charge must dissipate through the radio As the capacitor discharges a large negative transient is created on the antenna port of the radio Positive transients can also be created if the static charge buildup on the antenna has a negative polarity Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 22 Figure 15 Voltage transient immediately after the gas tube turns on The voltage across a capacitor cannot change instantaneously When the gas tube turns on the Thus when one side is pulled from 600 V to 0 V the other side voltage on the antenna drops to OV is pulled form 0 V to 600 V momentarily maintaining the 600 V almost simultaneously charge across the capacitor This causes a voltage spike on the antenna port of the radio DC Open Antenna DC blocking cap BPF Switch 0 V 600 V Transmitter Static Bleed DC Blocking Off Resistor Lightning Arrestor Receiver Gas Tube Short During testing transients were measured on the antenna port of CalAmp s Viper at voltage levels up to 280V These voltage transients often have high frequency content that can easily pass through any filterin
110. as free on air time gaps are accomplished often For example it may not be good to have a gap every 30 seconds only Note Sometimes polling less often helps to reduce traffic and improve response Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 180 POLLING REMOTE PLCS NON SEQUENTIALLY Polling messages non sequentially where several poll requests are initiated asynchronously overlapping each other is not recommended since it is less efficient But if the system cannot be converted or designed with sequential polling then some of the approaches used above for unsolicited messaging control adding free on air time may need to be applied MESSAGING WITH TCP AND TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT TCP is a stream protocol where lost parts of the data stream are being retried by the low level TCP driver of the PLC Often the higher level application of the PLC can function with TCP UDP or other These applications therefore have message timeouts to allow retransmission of a presumed lost or delayed message With TCP this is not really required since the low level driver will keep on trying and will only terminate the connection when tries are exhausted It is important to set the application message timeout long enough to minimize the application retrying above the TCP driver retries For example if the reply for message 1 was not received in time due to temporarily network congestion or outage and the TCP low level driver sti
111. at otherwise would have gone skywards and use it to increase the horizontal radiation The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms To reduce potential radio interference the antenna type and its gain should be chosen to ensure the effective isotropic radiated power EIRP is not more than required for successful communication 2 6 2 TYPES OF ANTENNAS A number of FCC approved antennas have been tested for use with the Viper Similar antenna types from other manufacturers may be equally acceptable It is important to follow the manufacturer s recommended installation procedures and instructions when mounting any antenna Table 11 Antenna Types Omni Vertical Collinear Vertical Dipole Omni Directional Antenna In general an omni directional antenna should be used at a master station and Relay Points This allows equal coverage to all of the remote locations Omni directional antennas are designed to radiate the RF signal in a 360 degree pattern around the antenna Short range antennas such as folded dipoles and ground independent whips are used to radiate the signal in a ball shaped pattern while high gain Omni antennas such as a collinear antenna compress the RF radiation sphere into the horizontal plane to provide a relatively flat disc shaped pattern that travels further because more of the energy is radiated in the horizontal plane Yagi Antenna At remote locations not used as a Relay Point a directional Yagi is generally r
112. ata rate Wing Commander parameters set Serial port data format correct 00007 Security has the same phrase in all Vipers 3 Ensure unique IP addresses and record for each location 4 Ensure the base station has been configured correctly and can communicate to the internal Vipers a Ensure the default gateway has been set in the base station controller b Ensure it is in auto mode if redundant base c Ensure two remote Vipers IPs have been configured if redundant base RF CONNECTIVITY AND PROTOCOL TESTING 1 Check and record forward and reverse power in Viper a Key the Viper via the web page RF test and check forward and reverse power readings under RF status b Correct any power issues if required If the reverse power is greater than 1 2 watts verify with a watt meter 2 Ping the master Viper from remote Use a ping utility CalAmp recommends Integra TR ping utility use random data 128 bytes 200 pings Ping success rate should be 9796 or greater 3 Check and record RSSI and SNR values a At the master record all remotes RSSI and SNR values b At the remote record the master s RSSI and SNR values 4 Ensure the SCADA host control center can send commands and poll to end devices Verify with the SCADA host control center that commands and responses are sent to and received from remote locations Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 155 APPENDIX E VIPER SC
113. aun nae E e Mita tem a de Ee DIE 171 LASTEN TII 172 Mern oce Mode emt E I H 172 Bau isisTo Mii rero ERR URN Tr 172 WA OCI OC cM M M 173 VEANTVIember TING eese tirado Sui acenisa nes ena UR S Mesi esti A I M M UEM ARM CM DI alee Ae CH M EIE 174 EXIM DIES saroe a UTmr em 174 Budge Mode VLAN Disa led csitanascstozuset teu sa tactu Momus eau cobra beet ae Sa UE Ls Ea ELEGIA a serene 175 Bridge Mode VLAN Enabled uite te ntl bare m ai Eas Reb b oap c UN OO nha uti sone bates cedo eos eov Cos ud vus e 177 R tter MORE orua T E 178 APPENDIX F Viper PEG SObU tre EO SN 180 PRG Ana Ladder LORIE S CUD erc 180 Polling Remote PLCs Without Unsolicited Me SSageS cccccsseccccsssccceeeceseuscecseuececsuuecessusecessuecesseuseesaueseesaaesessaeeess 180 Polling Remote PLCs with Unsolicited Messages and Remote to Remote PLC Messages eee 180 Polling Remote PLCs Non sequentially o ret E eee eren Ye e Y e EXE Y O RN edn Even Re a 181 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page vi Messaging with TCP and TCP Connection TIMEOUT cccccccsssccccessccceeesecceescccaeeccesesecsaueeceseuecesseseeseueeesaaesessaaeeees 181 Opening a new connection while previous TCP Connection Is Still In Progress cccccesecccssccceseeceeeeeeeceeenceeeneeeeneees 181 Cl
114. authenticate remote devices using the RADIUS server when they are powered on and at regular intervals The Viper will authenticate itself to the RADIUS server at startup The default setting is disabled The following figure illustrates device authentication using RADIUS with a Viper network In this example VPN client 2 requests a secure tunnel The VPN server initiates a RADIUS transaction to authenticate Client 2 using its MAC address as a user name and password The tunnel is created only if the RADIUS server responds with an authentication grant Figure 64 Device Authentication Viper 2 VPN Client RADIUS Server Viper 3 RADIUS Transactions VPN Client Viper 1 Access Point amp VPN Servier Viper 4 Device Authentication Enabled VPN Client To utilize device authentication your network must use the following parameters The master device Viper 1 must have Device Authentication Enabled and must be configured as an Access Point RF Network Settings RF Network and a VPN Server Security VPN All remote devices Vipers 2 3 amp 4 must have VPN Enabled and must be configured as VPN Clients Security VPN RADIUS Server IP IP Address of the RADIUS server RADIUS Server Port UDP port number to use when sending authentication requests to the RADIUS server RADIUS Secret Secret key shared between the RADIUS client and RADIUS server This key is used to encrypt messages exchanged between the client and server
115. ax 2 7 A max 1 8 A max 3 8 A typ 2 0 A typ 1 4 A typ 0 30 dBm 1 W 1 8 A max 1 0 A max 0 8 A max 1 4 A typ 0 8 A typ 0 6 A typ 5 50 in W x 2 125 in H x 4 25 in D 13 97 cm x 5 40 cm x 10 8 cm chassis only Overall Dimensions 6 50 in W x 2 17 in Hx 4 74 in D 16 5 cm x 5 51 cm x 12 0 cm with flat mount plate Mounting Options Mounting plate pattern and DIN Rail Shipping Weight 2 4 Ibs 1 1 kg Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 139 Modes of Operation Frequency Increment Power Source RF Impedance Transmitter VHF UHF 900 215 240 MHz 450 000 511 975 MHz 928 960 MHz Per FCC Regulatory gt 10 1 Power Foldback Allowed Rx to Tx Time lt 2ms 4 ms ETSI Versions Channel Switching Time lt 15 ms Band End to Band End Receiver Bandwidth 140 5018 50x 140 5028 50x 140 5048 30x 140 5098 30x Bit Rate 140 5048 50x 140 5098 50x Rx Frequencies 136 174 215 240 406 1125 470 000 880 902 MHz 450 000 511 975 928 960 MHz Data Sensitivity 6 25 kHz 10 Bit Error Rate 4 kbps 115 112 115 112 115 112 dBm BER 8 kbps 106 103 106 103 106 103 dBm 12 kbps 100 95 100 95 dBm Typical Max 12 5 kHz 8 kbps 116 114 116 114 116 114 112 109 dBm 16 kbps 109 106 109 106 109 106 106 103 dBm 24 kbps 102 98 102 98 102 98 99 95 dBm 32 kbps 95 91 95 91
116. b will change depending on the Version of online diagnostic messages you have selected above This section provides options for whether you want the Viper to use the IP Address or RF MAC address for identification Identification Select whether to use the IP Address or RF MAC Address of the Viper for identification in online diagnostics reporting The default setting is to use the IP Address Measurements These are presented as a checklist Check the items to be included in the online diagnostic reporting uncheck the items to omit The default setting is to include all items Save Click Save to save any changes you have made to settings in this tab See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note If you change the Version or add or remove any items in the measurements list in the lower section in this tab as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A a reset of the Viper is required before any of these settings will take effect 4 8 4 1 HUMAN READABLE OUTPUT FORMAT Note This section is optional For assistance or more specific information contact CalAmp technical support Or check the CalAmp Support website for information updates at http www calamp com su Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 121 With the Online Diagnostics Version set to 2 User Friendly and saved from a Command Prompt window type telnet nnn nnn nn
117. be a minimum of 8 and a maximum of 32 characters Data Key Strength Select the data key strength either 128 192 or 256 bits and click Set Strength Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 127 Data Key Enter the data key here and click Set Key This must match the key set in the WCP server database The key lengthe myst be exactly 16 24 or 32 characters corresponding to the data key strength values 128 192 or 256 Click Set Key to set the data key Logout and Save Click to log out and save the new configuration Logout and Don t Save Click to log out without saving the new configuration The new configuration will be lost after a unit reset Unit ID Enter a unique identifier to identify this unit This can be used when a file upload is targeted to this specific unit Group ID Up to four 4 group IDs may be entered This unit will participate in a file upload targeting any of these Group IDs Multicast Group The WCP server uses multicast messages to target all units simultaneously Therefore the multicast group address must match that which is used on the server for a file upload targeting this unit Local Port The IP port number entered here must match that which is used on the server Remote IP Address The destination IP address used when sending WCP messages If auto response is enabled this parameter is not used Remote Port The destination port number used w
118. bled the Viper will leave the TCP connection open indefinitely An existing TCP connection will only close if the remote endpoint closes the connection the Viper serial port is disabled or if the Viper is unable to successfully communicate with the remote endpoint during a data transmission The default setting is disabled zero 0 minutes Note RTS CTS Mode Settings apply only to the COM Port and this section does not apply for the Setup Port CTS assertion delay The time in milliseconds ms that the data will be displayed after the CTS has been sent The default setting is 4 milliseconds CTS negation delay The time in milliseconds ms that the CTS will be kept asserted after the last character has been transmitted The default setting is 4 milliseconds Send buffered data before negating CTS All the data will be sent before the Viper drops the CTS control line Fragment large messages Allows the data to be fragmented into smaller messages Discard all buffered data when entering flow control The data in the serial port buffer will be discarded and only new data will be processed under the flow control Save Click Save to save the settings if you have changed any of the settings in this tab Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any change you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Refresh Click Refresh to reload the tab with the settings currently in effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008
119. bol A 4 5 2 NAT NAT Network Address Translation is the second middle tab of the Router page To navigate to this tab select Router from the main menu and click NAT From this tab you can enable or disable Network Address Translation maintain a Private Network Table for NAT and NAT Port Forwarding Table NAT technology is a method by which IP addresses are mapped from one address space to another In Viper it is normally used on the WAN side of an IP network to hide local IP addresses from an external IP network that is the Internet On Viper units the user can select which one of the two interfaces Ethernet or RF will be considered private Figure 53 Router NAT NAT OtEnabled 9 Disabled 192 168 205 0 255 255 255 RF 10 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 USER1 44 USER USER3 Clear Table Save Cancel If you Save changes te any parameters marked db you wil need to reset the unit for them te take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 87 NAT NAT may be enabled or disabled on the Viper The default setting is Disabled Parameters in this section allow customization of the NAT firewall protection ETH hidden by NAT The Network Address Translation table hides IP Addresses on the Ethernet side when enabled RF Hidden by NAT The Network Address Translation table hides IP Addresses on the RF side when enabled User1 User2 User3 Specific IP Addres
120. c When B is reapplied to the White wire the Viper SC will wake up and be in full operation mode in approximately one second 1 s if VPN is not used If VPN is used wake up time will be less than or equal to five seconds 5 s Wake up time may increase if the system is congested since VPN requires the keys to be updated from the VPN server The following table shows the maximum current drain used by the White wire Input voltage is from 10 V DC to 30 V DC This will allow the user to size the DC switching line to control this feature Enable Ignition Sense Input Voltage Current Max Current Typ 10 V DC 0 3 mA max 0 2 mA max 20 V DC 0 5 mA max 0 4 mA max 30 V DC 0 7 mA max 0 6 mA max The following figure shows the Viper SC power connector and identifies the location of Pin 1 used for ignition sense Figure 82 Viper SC Power Connector Pin 1 C aaa POWER STATUS The amount of current drain will vary for each radio Initial testing has shown a current drain of approximately 130 mA at 12 V DC input This is a power consumption of less than 1 6 W These are average readings and are not a guaranteed specification Please Contact CalAmp Wireless Networks Group Technical Support with any questions Technical Support can be reached at Email productsupport calamp com Phone 1 507 833 6701 Option 2 for Fixed narrowband and radio modem products Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001
121. cast packets from the LAN interface to the RF interface Limited Broadcast is disabled by default Multicast Forwarding This parameter controls the forwarding of multicast packets from the LAN interface to the RF interface and vice versa The packets forwarded from the LAN to the RF interface are identified by the Multicast Address List All other multicast packets are dropped On the other hand the Multicast White List controls which multicast packets are passed from the RF interface to the LAN interface When the Multicast White List is empty all multicast packets received from the RF interface are passed on the LAN interface otherwise only the multicast packets identified in the white list are passed over the LAN The default setting for Multicast Forwarding is enabled Multicast to Broadcast LAN to RF When a multicast packet is forwarded from the LAN interface to the RF interface the destination IP address can be changed to the broadcast IP address 255 255 255 255 The default setting for Multicast to Broadcast for LAN to RF is disabled Multicast to Broadcast RF to LAN When a multicast packet is forwarded from the RF interface to the LAN interface the destination IP address can be changed to the broadcast IP address 255 255 255 255 The default setting for Multicast to Broadcast for RF to LAN is disabled All packets received from the LAN interface with a multicast destination IP address matching one of the multicast addre
122. ch is for Tagged Port Mode only is to keep the packet unchanged VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID and VID is not in Table Tagged Port Mode only If incoming packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID and is not in the VLAN Member Table you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag the packets or delete their tags The default for this setting which is for Tagged Port Mode only is to keep the packet unchanged Egress Packet Untagged The packet has no VLAN ID tag If exiting packets are untagged you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or tag them with PVID For both modes Untagged Port Mode and Tagged Port Mode the default setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID 0 If exiting packets have a VLAN ID set to zero 0 you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag them with PVID or delete their tag For both modes Untagged Port Mode and Tagged Port mode the default setting is to silently drop the packet VID PVID If exiting packets have a VLAN ID that is in the VLAN Member Table you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or delete their tag For Untagged Port Mode the default setting is to delete the tag For Tagged Port Mode the default setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID Untagged Port Mode only If exiting packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the P
123. common method for a polling master to manage RF traffic is for the HMI PLC polling master to poll one remote at a time The next polling message is not sent until the current message has been completed Done or has timed out This prevents more than one outstanding polling message Ladder logic programs typically refer to these parameters as the message Done and Error bits The Done and Error bits parameter values can be adjusted for longer timeout values if required Because the Viper SC has the ability to use two completely different and separate SCADA polling protocols it is important to have interaction between the two protocols The Viper SC can send out an Ethernet TCP IP polling message and also an RS232 polling message which may or may not be generated by the same HMI PLC CalAmp recommends the user program the polling sequence in each protocol with logic that interacts with the other s protocol Done and Error bits The Ethernet polling protocol would not be allowed to send a message until the current Ethernet message is either Done or Error and the previous RS232 message are either Done or Error bits are set The RS232 polling protocol would also have a similar logic Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 11 2 1 1 POINT TO POINT NETWORK A point to point network is the simplest type of network and may be used for connecting a pair of PCs a host computer and a terminal a SCADA pol
124. control mechanisms RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service A networking protocol that provides centralized authentication authorization and account management for computers to connect and use a network service RIPv2 Dynamic IP routing protocol based on the distance vector algorithm Router A networking device connecting multiple networks RS 232 Industry standard interface for data transmfer RTU Remote Terminal Unit A SCADA device used to gather information or control other devices SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition A general term referring to systems gathering data or performing control operations SINAD Slgnal to Noise And Distortion a ratio used as a measure of the quality of a signal from a communications device SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A protocol used by network management systems to manage and monitor network attached devices SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol A protocol for synchronizing clocks of computer systems over packet switched variable latency data networks Uses UDP as its transport layer Static IP Address A fixed address assigned to a computer or device connected to a computer or device connected to a network Static Routing Forwarding data in a network via a fixed path Subnet Mask An Ethernet address code determining network size and determining which addresses belong or do not on a specified subnet Switch A device connecting computi
125. cs related to the Quality of Service QoS for each of the transmit queues in the Viper Figure 43 RF Network Settings QoS Statistics Ca Qos RF Network RF RF Bandwidth Neighbor Global VLAN OoS Settings Network Management Table Settings Statistics RF Packets Bytes Packets Bytes Transmit Sent Sent Sent Sent Queue Success Failure Failure Bytes Packets Bytes Queued Queued Ctrl Queue LAN Queue 1 LAN Queue 2 LAN Queue 3 LAN Queue 4 LAN Queue 3 Port Refresh Clear Statistics RF Transmit Queue Identifies the transmit queue the transmit control queue transmit queues enabled and described in the RF Network Settings QoS tab or COM port queue or Setup port queue Packets Dropped Number of packets dropped because the RF transmit queue is full Bytes Dropped Number of bytes dropped because the RF transmit queue is full Packets Queued Number of packets in the RF transmit queue Refresh the tab contents to see the current number Bytes Queued Number of bytes in the RF transmit queue Refresh the tab contents to see the current number Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 72 Packets Sent Success Number of packets that have been successfully moved from the RF transmit queue and sent over the RF interface Bytes Sent Success Number of bytes that have been successfully moved from the RF transmit queue and sent o
126. d Products offered may contain software which is proprietary to CalAmp The offer or supply of these products and services does not include or infer any transfer of ownership No part of this documentation or information supplied may be divulged to any third party without the express written consent of CalAmp CalAmp reserves the right to update its products software or documentation without obligation to notify any individual or entity Product updates may result in differences between the information provided in this manual and the product shipped For access to the most current product documentation and application notes visit www calamp com RF Exposure Compliance Requirements Viper SC radios are intended for use in the Industrial Monitoring and Control and SCADA e markets Each Viper SC unit must be professionally installed and must ensure a minimum separation distance listed in the table below between the radiating structure and any person An antenna mounted on a pole or tower is the typical installation and in rare instances a 1 2 wave whip antenna is used RF Exposure Minimum Safety Distance Antenna Gain emOmapowe 5dsi i0dBi 15dBi 132 MHz VHF 215 MHz UHF 900 MHz Model PN 140 5098 304 900 MHz Model PN 140 5098 504 Note t is the responsibility of the user to guarantee compliance with the FCC MPE regulations when operating this device in a way other than described above The installer of
127. d i Viper via the back panel or cabinet ground ii PolyPhaser or an isolated grounding bus iii Antenna feedline cable shield iv Power supply Antenna mounting and alignment a Tower site antennas i Ensure the correct model was installed and record ii Ensure the antenna is mounted in the vertical straight up and down ii Ensure there is the recommended standoff from the tower leg if applicable v Ensure there is no other antenna mounted directly across from the antenna b Remote site antennas i Ensure antenna is mounted at least 12 inches from any obstacle ii If yagi ensure yagi is aligned back to the tower location Check with GPS iii Ensure yagi is mounted for vertical polarization and is level or slightly angled to the tower if extremely close Weatherproofing connections a All connections exposed to the weather should be weatherproofed after the site has been tested and verified to pass valid data Weatherproofing kits are available for outside RF connections This includes all shield grounds as well b Follow the manufacturer s recommended installation methods when applying weatherproofing Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 154 VIPER CONFIGURATION RADIO AND CONTROLLER BOARD FOR BASE STATION 1 Ensure the latest Viper firmware is installed 2 Ensure the Viper is configured correctly for each tower group Frequencies Power Bandwidth and over the air d
128. d click Advanced In this tab you can select if Serial RF bridge Broadcast will be RF Only or RF and LAN The parameter in this tab only has meaning when operating in Bridge mode Figure 60 Serial Advanced Serial Com Port Setup Port VLAN Advanced Serial RF bridge Broadcast RF Only RF and LAN Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked dy you wil need to reset the unit for them to take effect Serial RF Bridge Broadcast When a serial port is operating in Serial RF Bridge mode the packets received by the Viper from the serial port are sent over RF to all remote Vipers so they can pass this data over their corresponding serial port The sending Viper achieves this by using a broadcast IP address On reception the remote Viper will pass this data over its serial port AND optionally send the data over its LAN port RF Only e When receiving Serial RF bridge data from a remote Viper over RF pass it to the corresponding serial port and do not send a copy of the data over the LAN port e When transmitting Serial RF bridge data to remote Vipers over RF do not send a copy on the LAN port RF and LAN e When receiving Serial RF bridge data from a remote Viper over RF pass it to the corresponding serial port and send a copy of the data over to the LAN port e When transmitting Serial RF bridge data to remote Vipers over RF send a copy over the LAN port Viper SC IP Router for Licensed S
129. d User 2 Private Router Routing Table NAT VTS NAT Enabled Disabled 192 168 205 0 255 255 255 0 10 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 USER1 192 168 205 125 USER2 192 168 205 90 255 255 255 255 USER3 4 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Clear T able t p a a a 0 d d e FPF FP P ala a Clear T able Save Cancel If you Save changes te any parameters marked db you wil need to reset the unit for them te take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 165 NAT PORT FORWARDING The NAT Port Forwarding table allows the user to specify a particular public port or range of ports to be forwarded to the private network hidden by the Network Address Translation table The user can also select between TCP and UDP protocols The following figure shows the NAT Eth IP subnet 192 168 205 0 will be hidden from the public network Any TCP packets sent to the Viper with port number 2000 will be redirected to the Private IP Address and Private Port number entered in the NAT Forwarding Table Figure 93 NAT Port Forwarding Port 2000 is redirected to 192 168 205 125 23 Routing Table NAT VTS NAT Enabled Disabled 192 168 50 0 255 255 255 RF 10 128 0 0 255 255 2550 USERI USER 4 Clear T able Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked PN you will need te reset the unit for them to take effect The following figure shows the Private
130. d With PVID With PVID Ingress Packet Untagged Oo VID 0 VID PVID VID I PVID Egress Packet Untagged VID 0 VID PVID VID I PVID O 0000 coo Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked you will need to reset the unit for them to take effect Untagged Port Advanced Settings provide options for ingress packets packets coming into the Viper and egress packets packets leaving the Viper Selections in this section allow you to specify what actions are to be taken with ingress and egress packets based on their VLAN ID VID tag or absence of a VID tag VID is the VLAN ID contained in the packet PVID is the Port VLAN ID the VLAN ID associated with the interface and configured in the Viper Web Interface Ingress Packet Untagged The packet has no VLAN ID tag If incoming packets are untagged you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or tag the packets with the PVID The default setting is to tag the packet with the PVID Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 80 VID 0 If incoming packets have a VLAN ID set to zero 0 you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag the packets with the PVID or delete their tag The default setting is to silently drop the packet VID PVID The packet has a VLAN ID that is the same as the PVID If incoming packets have a VLAN ID that is the same as the PVID you can choose
131. d only when data is present at the serial port This should be configured to match the settings of the connected device The default setting is Envelope Mode Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 92 Packet Forwarding Threshold Allows you to change the Mark Character time for forwarded packets based on the character length Possible selections are two 2 through 8 inclusive The default setting is four 4 Flow Control Allows the implementation of RTS CTS flow control or None This should be configured to match the setting of the connected device The default setting is CTS Based Note Request to Send and Clear to Send flow control will require a five wire connection to the COM port or Setup port Connection Control Select Permanent 3 wire when the serial port is always enabled or select Switched DTR bringup teardown when DTR is used to enable or disable the serial connection This should be configured to match the settings of the connected device The default setting is Permanent 3 wire Status Displays the status of the serial connection Whether the connection is ready or down Advanced Settings Show or Hide Click Show to show advanced settings in the lower part of the tab click Hide to hide the advanced settings Save Click Save to save the settings if you have changed any of the settings in this tab Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any change you may have made to any of the settin
132. d other conditions set forth in the authorization FCC Emission Designators Viper SC 100 400 FCC IC Type Acceptance 6 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 25 0 kHz type Bandwidth kHz 6 esm mp 4 s som 8 uses aws s 850m som s uses xps s eoue sorm Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 148 FCC Emission Designators Viper SC 200 FCC Type Acceptance 6 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 25 0 kHz 50 0 kHz Model Number Channel Channel Data Rate Baud Rate OCBW Emission Designator type Bandwidth kHz 140 5028 502 0 6 25 kHz 4kbps 4 3 30kHz 3K30F1D 140 5028 503 6 25 kHz 8 kbps 3 55 kHz 3K55F1D 12 5 kHz 8kbps 8 820kHz 8K20F1D 12 5 kHz l kbps 8 8 30kHz 8K30F1D 25 0 kHz 16 kbps 16 5 kHz 16K5F1D 25 0 kHz 32 kbps 16 8 kHz 16K8F1D 6 625kHz 12 kbps 3 20 kHz 3K20F1D 6 25 kHz 16 kbps 3 45 kHz 3K45F1D HENCE 12 5 kHz 24 kbps 08 8 50 kHz 8K50F1D lt a 12 5 kHz 32 kbps 8 8 08 kHz 8KO8F1D 25 0 kHz 48 kbps 17 8 kHz 17K8F1D 25 0 kHz 64 kbps 17 0 kHz 17KOF1D 50 0 kHz 32 kbps 33 3 kHz 33K3F1D 50 0 kHz 64 kbps 34 3 kHz 34K3F1D 50 0 kHz 96 kbps 36 0 kHz 36KOF1D 50 0kHz 128kbps 33 0 kHz 33KOF1D Viper SC 900 SC 900 FCC Type Acceptance 6 25 kHz 12 5 kHz 25 0 kHz 50 0 kHz m Number Channel Channel Data Rate Baud Rate OCBW Emission Designator type Bandwidth kHz 140 5098 502 WO 6 25 kHz 4 kbps 0004 3 30 kHz 3K30F1D 140 5098 503 6 25 kHz 8 kbps 3 55 kHz 3K5
133. dix Note When required contact your PLC provider or Allen Bradley or Rockwell Automation support PLC Ladder Logic On Restart Opens All Connections At Once Instead Of Sequentially When the PLC ladder program is set up to have at startup all write message rungs set to true all TCP connections are triggered simultaneously This creates an overload of TCP SYNs and somewhat could congest the on air traffic depending on the system It is recommended to setup the ladder write message rungs not to start up simultaneously Write messages should be setup to open the TCP connection sequentially For more information it may be required to contact your PLC provider or Allen Bradley or Rockwell Automation support Allen Bradley CompactLogix and ControlLogix Series PLCs Ethernet IP Connection Timeout Setting Timeout Too Short Can Cause Problems When using the Ethernet IP with Allen Bradley CompactLogix or ControlLogix Logix series the TCP Connection timeout is set on a per message instruction basis using Message Configuration rather than Channel Configuration Channel 1 of the MicroLogix series that was shown in the previous section When messages are defined using Message Configuration and using path for example LocalENB 2 192 168 1 9 1 0 in this example TCP connection is opened when the first message is sent The TCP connection timeout is set by default to 120 seconds since the inactivity default setting is 120 seconds
134. e Click Save to save any changes you have made to the Neighbor Table Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any change 1 4 3 3 2 NEIGHBOR TABLE FOR ROUTER MODE The Viper SC is an IP packet router radio that forwards packets to their destination based on routing statements which network to send a packet to in the routing table The routing statements are automatically populated into the routing table by entries from the Neighbor Table shown in the following figure Neighbors can be enrolled into the Neighbor Table by three different methods Auto Scan Manual Scan and Static Entries Figure 36 RF Network Settings Neighbor Table Router Mode RF Network RF RF Bandwidth Neighbor Global Li 7 Vui l ha ET E Za Settings Metwork Management Table Settings Manual Scan Auto Scan 9 Disabled If you Save changes to any parameters marked fy you wil need to reset the unit for them to take effect Save Cancel Neighboring Discovery 00 1 Disabled Vipers found 4 Duration 00 00 00 80 00 02 10 128 0 2 24 192 168 206 1 24 50 78 1 80 00 02 Static Reachable 80 00 03 10 128 0 3 24 192 168 207 1 24 1 80 00 03 Static Unreachable 80 00 04 10 128 0 4 24 192 158 208 1 24 1 80 00 04 Static Unreachable 80 00 05 10 128 0 5 24 192 168 209 1 24 2 80 00 02 Static Unreachable Clear ASSls Clear List Force Sean Test Connectivity Add Static Entry Delete Entry Refresh Viper SC IP Router
135. e And Support And Warranty Statement cccccccssscccesseceeeseceeeeeseeaesees 194 WV Nes ah SLEMEN ec a cr PT 195 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page vii 1 VIPER SC OVERVIEW The Viper SC provides any IP enabled device with connectivity to transmit data This DSP based radio was designed for industrial applications utilizing 136 174 MHz 215 240 MHz 406 1125 511 975 MHz 880 902 MHz and 928 960 MHz frequencies Operational as a wideband IP modem or router Viper SC is optimized for use in SmartGrid distribution automation and SCADA applications SCADA applications are defined as those with one or more centralized control sites used to monitor and control remote field devices over wide areas For example a regional utility may monitor and control networks over an entire metropolitan area Industry sectors with SCADA systems include energy utilities water and wastewater utilities and environmental groups 1 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Designed to replace wire lines the Ethernet and RS 232 serial ports allow direct connection to Programmable Logic Controllers PLCs or Remote Terminal Units RTUs Viper Viper SC and Viper SC supports serial and Ethernet IP RTUs and PLCs It is Standard IEEE 802 3 compliant Viper supports any protocol running over IPv4 including ICMP IPinIP IPsec RSVP TCP and UDP protocols It provides MAC layer bridging and HTTP ARP and
136. e Note that follows Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 81 Figure 50 LAN Settings VLAN tab showing Advanced Settings only when Tagged Port is selected Advanced Settings Show Hide Silently Keep Retag Tag Delete Drop Packet Packet Packet Tag Packet Unchanged With PVID With PVID Ingress Packet Untagged VID 0 VID PVID VID PVID VID is in Table VID I PVID VID is not in Table Egress Packet Untagged VID 0 VID PVID VID PVID VID is in Table VID PVID VID is not in Table Cancel m jon Delete VLAN ID From Table 1 14094 table empty O GO 00000 00000 00000 O If you Save changes te any parameters marked Ay you wil need te reset the unit for them to take effect The Tagged Port Advanced Settings section of the LAN Settings VLAN tab allows you to specify what actions are to be taken with ingress and egress packets based on their VLAN ID VID tag or absence of a VID tag VID is the VLAN ID contained in the packet PVID is the Port VLAN ID the VLAN ID associated with the interface and configured in the Viper Web Interface Ingress Packet Untagged The packet has no VLAN ID tag If incoming packets are untagged you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or tag the packets with the PVID The de
137. e Viper The Viper goes from the Scanning For Neighbors state to the Ready state when it stops learning any new neighbor information for a specified amount of time this value can be changed using the parameter neighborDiscovery convergeTimeout expressed in milliseconds In the Ready state the Viper is generating keep alive packets The rate at which keep alive packets are generated can be changed using the parameter neighborDiscovery keepAliveTimeout In the Ready state the Viper performs broken link detection The Viper is monitoring the keep alive packets of other units one 1 hop away The Viper knows the interval at which other units are generating their keep alive packets If a unit fails to receive four 4 keep alive packets in a row from another unit it removes that unit from its neighbor table and goes into the Scanning For Neighbors state If the user clicks Force Scan button in the Control Operations section near the bottom the Viper goes into the Scanning For Neighbors state If any remote units initiate the Scanning For Neighbors state the local Viper also goes into the Scanning For Neighbors state Disabled The neighbor discovery module is disabled and the Viper will not learn about any new neighbors It will not generate any keep alive packets CalAmp recommends the following Auto Scan This feature is only for projects that contain no more than ten 10 radios with very strong RF paths Manual Scan This should only
138. e is normally never any reason to change the LAN Gateway address as the Viper does this for you whenever you perform a scan on the network or statically add an Access Point Viper to the neighbor table LAN MTU The Maximum Transfer Unit MTU is the maximum number of bytes the unit will send in a packet Acceptable values range from 576 to 1500 The default value is 1500 Maintenance settings allow you to have two IP addresses for the Ethernet interface RJ 45 LAN connection CalAmp recommends the maintenance IP address be a common IP address in all Viper radios in the system This allows the user to enter this common IP address into all radios locally to obtain access Maintenance IP Address Enter a maintenance IP address that is different from the LAN IP Address The default maintenance IP address is 1 1 1 1 Maintenance Netmask Enter the netmask for the maintenance IP address Together with the maintenance IP address the maintenance netmask determines the subnet the maintenance IP address of the Viper is on The netmask selected depends on the network topology The default maintenance netmask is 255 255 255 0 Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note If you change the LAN IP Address LAN Netmask LAN MTU Maintenance IP Address or Maintenance Netmask setting in this tab as indicated by the y
139. ecommended to minimize interference to and from other users Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 24 Vertical Dipoles Vertical dipoles are very often mounted in pairs or sometimes groups of three or four to achieve even coverage and to increase gain The vertical collinear antenna usually consists of several elements stacked one above the other to achieve similar results 2 6 3 FEEDLINE The choice of feedline should be carefully considered Poor quality coaxial cables should be avoided as they will degrade system performance for both transmission and reception The cable should be kept as short as possible to minimize signal loss See the following table for feedline recommendations Table 12 Transmission Loss per 100 Feet 1 2 Heliax 0 68 dB 1 51 dB 2 09 dB 7 8 Heliax 0 37 dB 0 83 dB 1 18 dB 1 5 8 Heliax 0 22 dB 0 51 db 0 69 dB Outside cable connections should have a weather kit applied to each connection to prevent moisture Feedline connections should be routinely inspected to minimize signal loss through the connection A 3 dB loss in signal strength due to cable loss and or bad connections represents a 50 reduction in signal strength 2 6 4 RF EXPOSURE COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS Viper SC radios are intended for use in the Industrial Monitoring and Control and SCADA 9 markets Each Viper SC unit must be professionally installed and must ensure a minimum separation distance l
140. econds usec or us or 30 seconds Figure 102 MSG1 UnconnectedTimeout ConnectionRate and TimeoutMultiplier MSG17 UnconnectedT imecut So0000000 M5G1 Connectionk ate 7500000 M51 7 imeouth ultiplier 0 When Communication Is Between ControlLogix or CompactLogix And Other Logix Series PLCs To lower the on air traffic uncheck Connected in the Message Configuration Communication tab in the PLC setup The following figure shows an example when the Message Type is CIP Data Table Read or CIP Data Table Write Note that the Connected checkbox should be unchecked This is because if you leave it checked then every time the MSG instruction is executed a CIP connection with CIP Open message will be established and broken with CIP close message which adds unnecessarily to the network traffic Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 191 Figure 103 Message Configuration Communication showing Connected checkbox unchecked Message Configuration M5G1 Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Data Table Read w Source Element Number Of Elements 1 Message Configuration MSG1 Destination Element RERFENSTTERV RU MM e Configuration Communication Tag Path RETIREES eee LocalEMB 2 132 158 1 3 1 0 Broadcast Communication Method CIF DH Channel s Maly q m 7i rc CIP With Source Link De Source ID C Connected Cache C
141. ect whether temperature will be reported in degrees Celsius or degrees Fahrenheit on the Unit Status tab of the Home page and in Online Diagnostics messages The default setting is Celsius VLAN Mode The VLAN Virtual Local Area Network mode is available in bridge mode only In router mode it is enabled but does not affect packet forwarding and handling in any way When the VLAN mode is enabled the Ethernet interface can be configured to operate in tagged or untagged mode the RF interface operates in tagged mode and the Serial ports operate in untagged mode Untagged Devices on this interface are not using VLAN tags Incoming ingress packets are tagged with the port VLAN ID PVID VLAN tags are removed on outgoing egress packets Tagged Devices on this interface are using VLAN tags Incoming ingress packets are forwarded with their VLAN ID Outgoing egress packets keep their VLAN tags See configuration tabs for each interface for more specific VLAN configuration options Management VLAN When Management VLAN is enabled access to the unit will be allowed only through the Management VLAN ID Management VLAN ID The ID is a value from 1 to 4094 inclusive Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note If you change the VLAN Mode Management VLAN or Management VLAN
142. ected Operation With the Connected option selected and polling interval between messages for the same remote CIP connection is longer than the UnconnectedTimeout default 30 seconds CIP Forward Open and CIP Forward Close messages add 4 extra on air messages includes message reply for each unit polled If each poll is 2 messages message and reply the 4 extra messages increase the message load on air by 200 Therefore the Connected checkbox should be unchecked Unconnected to avoid sending CIP Forward Open and CIP Forward Close messages If Connected is required then increase the UnconnectedTimeout and ConnectionRate timeout to a value greater than the polling interval per remote use precaution with this Timeouts used for message responses over Ethernet IP Connected or Unconnected should not be too short and therefore should not be set shorter than 15 seconds normally in the event it is required to be lower than 30 seconds for application level retransmission The TCP IP communication driver does its own retransmissions and will not require application retransmissions of messages since a TCP connection will not lose a message unless the connection terminates normally or due to a problem Therefore with TCP longer timeouts within reason are okay Longer timeouts for example 30 seconds are okay since they minimize duplicated messages being buffered by TCP in the event of network congestion or communication problems with the remote unit
143. ed Configurations on the previous page to select and use the cloned configuration Note A reset of the Viper is required before the setting from the imported cloned configuration will take effect as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A If desired you can go through other page tabs to see how the Viper will be configured when restarted using the cloned configuration Important If you use a cloned configuration from another Viper the LAN IP Address is the one setting that you will want to change from the LAN IP Address setting of the Viper you cloned the configuration from since each unit ona subnet should have a unique IP Address After you reset the Viper you will need to enter its IP Address in your computer s browser address bar If any changes to User Names or Passwords were affected you will also need this information to reconnect and access the Viper via your browser after rebooting For assistance with using CalAmp provided configurations or cloned configurations the following topic contact CalAmp technical support Or check the CalAmp Support website for information updates at http www calamp com support Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 133 7 UPGRADING FIRMWARE 7 1 FIRMWARE INTRODUCTION The Viper uses two sets of firmware code The Device Maintenance page shown in the following figure displays the versions of the Modem and Radio firmware code currently running on the V
144. ed listen to noise and data Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 46 e Enabled listen to data only e Disabled These are explained below Enabled listen to noise and data In this mode of operation the Viper acts as a TCP server It can accept up to 256 TCP connections from remote endpoints Data received from any remote endpoint is sent over the serial port Data received from the serial port is sent to every endpoint connected to the TCP server Received level is above the carrier sense threshold if e The Viper is receiving valid data e The Viper is not receiving data because two or more Vipers are transmitting at the same time causing a collision e The Viper is not receiving data because the RF level is right at or below data sensitivity or e There is interference from another RF system or electrical devices on the frequency that the Viper is operating on Enabled listen to data only The Viper will monitor the RF level on the receive channel When the received level is above the carrier sense threshold the Viper will try to receive and decode any and all messages from remove Vipers When data is ready to transmit the Viper will first check the receive level If the receive level is below the carrier sense threshold the Viper will immediately transmit data If the receive level is above the carrier threshold the Viper will try to determine if it is receiving valid data or just noise If i
145. efore may require tuning afterwards POLLING REMOTE PLCS WITH UNSOLICITED MESSAGES AND REMOTE TO REMOTE PLC MESSAGES Polling using unsolicited messages is less preferable than polling sequentially each remote from the master only In this case more on air collisions can occur since messages from the master PLC destined for the remote PLC and messages from any remote destined for the master could have been sent on air at the same time These messages will be retried by the Viper in router mode and if successful all is fine If the system traffic is loaded by many remotes and masters sending messages then many message retries are made and throughput goes down The Viper protocol also has mechanisms to handle contention but sometimes there is just too much to handle When unsolicited or remote to remote PLC messaging is required then it is important to time or limit the amount of these messages For example the master sequential poll could be set up to give some free air time between each poll to allow unsolicited messages from remotes or between remotes to use the free air time to exchange messages The time to wait between messages depends on overall network load and may only be adjusted once the system is running Maybe start by using a one second gap between polls or derive a value based on the project traffic load There are different ways to achieve freeing up air time to allow others to communicate Other ways could also be okay as long
146. eft and the other is called right Any data received from the left socket endpoint is sent over the right socket endpoint Any data received from the right socket endpoint is sent over the left socket endpoint The socket endpoints can operate in TCP server mode TCP client mode or UDP mode Up to five 5 Virtual Terminal Servers can be configured and enabled Each Virtual Terminal Server that is enabled works independently of any others Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 88 Figure 54 Router VTS Router Routing Table NAT WTS Mode TCP Server Local IP Address auo v Local Port 4 6281 0 65535 0 auto 0 65535 0 auto Remote IP Address Remote Port 1 865535 6278 1 565535 TCP Keepalive minutes O disabled minutes O disabled UDP Auto Response i Enabled Disabled O Enabled 9 Disabled UDP Local Copy Enabled Disabled O Enabled 9 Disabled Status ode Local IP Address auo Local Port 6285 0 65535 OQ auto 6295 0 65535 O auto Remote IP Address 1001 Remote Port d 6285 1 65535 6278 1 655535 TCP Keepalive minutes disabled minutes O disabled UDP Auto Response 44 Enabled Disabled Q Enabled 9 Disabled UDP Local Copy Enabled Disabled O Enabled Disabled Status Cancel If you Save changes te any parameters marked fy you will need te reset the unit for them
147. elay Point Delete RF Network RF _ RF Bandwidth Neighbor Global Settings Network Management Table Settings VLAN LJ aS Save Refresh RF MAC Enter the MAC address of the unit to be added to the Neighbor Table Remote Unit List Click Add Viper to add the address to the table below The Remote Unit List is the Neighbor Table when the Viper is in Bridge Mode The RF MAC address of the Viper is displayed in the top header row of the table for reference Note The Remote Unit List Neighbor table is updated every time the Viper sends or receives data to or from the Viper to the remote unit Remote Unit RF MAC This table column displays the RF MAC address for each remote unit Communication Path This column indicates the communication path from this unit to the remote e Direct means that there is no intervening unit Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 57 e Relay Point means that there is a relay point in between Setting Displays the current setting for the remote that is represented in the table row and allows you to change it if required e Dynamic The remote unit was discovered dynamically by sending or receiving a packet e Relay Point This unit is a static entry in the remote table Delete Allows you to remove entries from the table To delete a unit from the table click Delete in the row of the table that represents the unit to be deleted Sav
148. ellow alert symbol A a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 74 4 4 2 DHCP DHCP is the second from left tab in the LAN Settings page To navigate to this tab select LAN Settings from the main menu and click DHCP In this tab you can enable or disable the DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server in the Viper and set other DHCP parameters Figure 45 LAN Settings DHCP Broadcast VLAN Ethernet PHY rise LAN DHCP SNTP nea Settings Settings Multicast DHCP Server O Enable Disable Start Address Number of Leases il Lease Duration A 0 Minutes 0 Infinite Gateway Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked dh you will need to reset the unit for them to take effect DHCP Server The DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server can be enabled or disabled The default setting is DHCP Server enabled Start Address This is the first address that will be leased to other devices on the subnet when the DHCP Server is enabled When a Viper is configured as a DHCP server this filed represents the beginning IP address of the pool managed by the DHCP Server Normally the Viper automatically calculates a default lease Start address as the Ethernet IP address of the Viper plus one Number of Leases The maximum number of IP Addresses that will be leased out to units
149. ends its own keep alive packet periodically Scanning For Neighbors The Neighbor Discovery module is trying to learn about other units Other units are learning about this unit Saving Neighbor Table In this state the Viper is saving all neighbor entries of the type Dynamic into nonvolatile memory When the save is complete all these entries are now of type Locked This state only occurs when the Neighbor Discovery module is operating in Manual Scan mode Testing Connectivity The Neighbor Discovery module is verifying that the units in the neighbor table are reachable by sending them an alive request and waiting for an alive response Round trip time must not exceed ten 10 seconds The alive request is only sent once Disabled The Neighbor Discovery module is disabled Local Status also reports the number of Neighboring Vipers Found and the Discovery Duration which is the time it took for the Viper to complete the neighbor discovery learning process Each entry in this table represents a remote unit The table displays information about the remote device and information about the route to each remote device Information on Neighboring Vipers RF MAC Address Identifies each entry uniquely Click the RF Mac Address entries to display the details of the selected device in the Neighbor Node Detail window Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 60 Figure 37 Neighbor Node Detail w
150. enu in the Config Control tab of the Device Maintenance page of the Viper Web Interface See the following figure which shows the list of the sample files 6 1 USING CALAMP PRE PROVIDED CANNED CONFIGURATIONS The following figure shows several CalAmp pre provided or canned configurations The list you see may differ slightly from the list available at the time of this writing but the file names should give some insight into the function and purpose for the configuration To try any of these pre installed configurations select Device Maintenance from the Main Menu and then select Config Control to navigate to the Config Control tab Figure 78 Drop down list in Device Maintenance Config Control Showing Available Sample Configurations Device Maintenance Config Control Package Control Wing Commander Save Configuration using this name dep O Import Configuration from A Delete Configuration bridge mode high reliability drp Firmware Upgrade Settings pidge mode low latency drp Merge settings bundled in upgrade pa bridge mode mid reliability latency drp router mode high reliability drp SGIOFy SEHiige router mode ow Istency dp router mode mid reliability latency drp Restore Factory Settings Ver35Testdrp 192 165 205 1_rfimacs00001_Masterl_DemoProjectdrp Proceed Cancel Note Some operations may take a minute or so to complete Operations marked i will require you to p
151. er network Routing mode only Access Point Yes ONo Multi Speed Mode A single communication speed may be selected between units Multi Speed disabled or varying speeds Multi Speed Mode Disabled Enabled Quit Previous The i symbol indicates that this parameter will require a Reset before it takes effect Enter a Station Name up to forty 40 characters in length This should be a name that is unique different from the names assigned to other units on the network Select the IP Forwarding Mode The Mode may be set as either Bridge or Router Bridge mode is recommended for very simple network topologies Router mode covers network topologies from simple to complex The default IP Forwarding Mode is Bridge mode Select whether or not this Viper will function as a relay point Relay points are used for relaying broadcast information and for forwarding online diagnostics to Access Point or AP or Default Gateway DG Relay points must be selected carefully to reduce traffic in the network The default setting is No not a relay point Select whether this Viper will function as an Access Point This is the default gateway for WAN access of a Viper network One and only one access point may be defined for each Viper network The default setting is No Select whether multi speed mode will be enabled or disabled for the Viper router The default setting is Enabled Click Apply to save any settings you have made in t
152. er of active tunnels that are ready Tunnels in Key Exchange Lists the number of active tunnels in Key Exchange Packets Sent Number of packets sent by the Viper through all VPN tunnels Packets Received Number of packets received by the device from all VPN tunnels Packets Received in Error Number of packets received in error by the Viper from all VPN tunnels Possible causes of packets received in error are Reception of non VPN packets when Block non VPN Packets is enabled Decryption errors due to key exchange or packet corruption infrequent Note These settings are not affected by Set to Defaults Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 109 VPN Password This field is used to change the password used to gain access to VPN configuration settings The password must contain at least eight 8 and no more than fifteen 15 characters using a combination of three out of the following four types of characters Uppercase letters Lowercase letters Numbers Special characters Notes The list of supported special characters is displayed after entering an invalid password The VPN service cannot be enabled if this field is not set Key Strength The number of bits used by all VPN keys The value can be one of the following 128 bits 16 text characters or 32 hexadecimal digits 192 bits 24 text characters or 48 hexadecimal digits 256 bits 3
153. erature units can be configured on the source Viper in Home Basic Settings Source supply voltage in excess of 8 volts shown in tenths 0 1 of volts Supply voltage ODM reading 10 8 V A reading of 35 for example means 11 5 V C RSSI measured at the source Viper for the last message received from the destination Viper This is also referred to as the Local RSSI Use the following table to interpret the RSSI value RSSI measured at the destination Viper for the last message received from the source Viper This is also referred to as the Remote RSSI Use the following table to interpret the RSSI value Radio antenna forward power measured in tenths 0 1 of watts at the source Viper A value of 51 for example means 5 1 W Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 122 Output Definitions Radio antenna reverse power measured in tenths 0 1 of watts at the source Viper A value of 2 for example means 0 2 W PER measured at the source This is calculated as the percentage of packets rejected due to an invalid header checksum over the total number of packets received To fit a small unsigned integer this value is multiplied by 1000 and its maximum value is limited at 255 A reading of 2 for example means 0 002 of packets were rejected Table 17 Online Diagnostics RSSI Display Notes NA MefSesmteiie OOOO ewm o o o e a RSSI 60 X x 0 25 for X not equal to 0 4
154. erference the antenna type and its gain should be chosen to ensure the effective isotropic radiated power EIRP is not more than required for successful communication Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 5 WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not disconnect unless power has been removed or the area is known to be non hazardous WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2 The unit must be powered with a Listed Class 2 or LPS power supply or equivalent 1 4 PART NUMBERS AND AVAILABILITY Viper SC is available in various models Each is available with a range of features kits and accessories Refer to the following table for product availability and part numbers for ordering Refer to tables that follow for Viper SC accessories and for antenna options and kits 1 4 1 VIPER SC RADIO The following tables list Viper SC radios and kit part numbers Table 6 Viper SC Radio and Kit Part Numbers Viper SC 100 Series 136 174 MHz Model Number Frequency Range Description 140 5018 502 136 174 MHz Viper SC 136 174 MHz 6 25 50 kHz BW 140 5018 503 136 174 MHz Viper SC 136 174 MHz 6 25 50 kHz BW 2RFP 140 5118 502 136 174 MHz Viper SC Std BS 136 174 MHz 6 25 50 kHz BW Viper SC 200 Series 215 240 MHz Model Number Frequency Range Description 140 5028 504 215 240 MHz Viper SC 215 240 MHz 6 25 100 kHz BW 140 5028 505
155. erform a Reset Unit after a successful completion Click the down arrow at the right of the list box to expand the drop down menu and select the desired canned configuration from the list and then click Proceed near the bottom of the tab Note A reset of the Viper is required before the setting from the imported canned configuration will take effect as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A If desired you can go through other page tabs to see how the Viper will be configured when restarted Important If you select a configuration that changes the LAN IP Address from the LAN IP Address you entered in your computer s browser address bar or changes User Names and Passwords to access the device you will need to know these to reconnect via the browser after rebooting the Viper For assistance with using CalAmp provided configurations or cloned configurations the following topic contact CalAmp technical support Or check the CalAmp Support website for information updates at http www calamp com support Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 132 6 2 CLONING A VIPER The Viper configuration can also be cloned copied from another Viper by importing an existing configuration file from another Viper An FTP utility is required to transfer the desired configuration from another Viper to the Viper being cloned from the other After the configuration file has been transferred to the Viper using an FTP u
156. esessanseees 184 Replacing Or Resetting A Viper Using Proxy Mode Without Restarting Polling esee 184 Allen Bradley PEC Tor VIPER SYSTEM so odia tus ed omes is eod tau Gen acdeaesncttedes adoret tes e sa teameuse tc Sin dnd utis Suse eeasten 184 Allen Bradley Micrologix 1100 or 1400 may also apply to SLC 5 s esoessesennessssssreresssssrrerressssrrereeessseerereessssreereessssns 185 PLC Ladder Logic On Restart Opens All Connections At Once Instead Of Sequentially eeessss 185 PLC Sends Too Many CIP Forward Open and CIP Forward Close Messages eem 185 More about Message Reply Timeout cccccccsssccccssecccescccsenscccsuesccsauecessenecesseeeessueseesauecessueeeeseausesseuseessaeeeesaases 186 PLC Sends Many TCP IP Keep Alive Messages rie DE e Fete n cbe A ow ato a pb neuen oleo edie a PEN REDE 186 PLC Reopens TCP IP Connection With the Same Source POrt ccsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesssssssessssesseeaeeas 187 PLC Detecting Communication Failure While Viper TCP IP Filters Keep Alives eeeeeeerr 187 Allen Bradley MicroLogix firmware overview at the time of writing this document cccccccssseececceeeeeeeeaeeeees 187 Allen Bradley ControlLogix and CompactLogics PLC for Viper System ccccccssssecceceessecceceeeeeccesaeeeecessaeaseceseeaeeeeeees 188 Allen Bradley CompactLogix and ControlLogix PLCS
157. eson vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF EU and EFTA Member States Acceptable Frequency Table Country Acceptable Frequencies Prohibited Frequencies ae E 406 1 430 or 440 470 450 470 Wa SNe Demak 4615 518 5 35 I A Bm Ne France CowdAWy oaaao 142 174 406 1250 420 421 449 450 511 975 Hungary 142 174 Contact Authority 406 125 470 450 511 975 142 174 Contact Authority Latvia 142 174 450 470 406 125 470 470 511 975 Lithuania 406 125 430 136 146 440 470 430 440 470 512 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 147 Country Acceptable Frequencies Prohibited Frequencies Luxembourg 146 156 5125 142 145 156 5375 156 7625 431 439 156 8375 169 4 471 511 975 169 825 174 406 1 430 440 470 M Contact Authority Contact Authority 174 142 145 448 406 25 409 449 470 450 511 975 146 174 142 145 401 6 410 440 470 411 439 450 470 471 511 975 Da aam m 406 1 470 NM losses 406 125 512 The countries not listed above did not reply to the notification which means the country authority did not have any Slovak Republic 146 410 question or problem with the notification information however it will still be necessary to obtain a license and or authorization from the appropriate country authority and to operate the device in accordance with the frequency power an
158. estination ports 5555 to O allows packets to only port 5555 Destination ports 5555 to 6000 allows packets to all ports between 5555 and 6000 Default 0 allow any port Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Refresh Click Refresh to update the status and statistics to show the most current information available Clear Clicking Clear or cycling power to the Viper will reset all statistics to zero Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 113 4 8 DIAGNOSTICS The Diagnostics tab contains five tabs Interface Statistics Remote Statistics SNMP Online Diagnostics and Radio Log 4 8 1 INTERFACE STATISTICS Interface Statistics is the first left most tab in the Diagnostics page To navigate to this tab select Diagnostics from the main menus This tab provides information about packets sent and received on each of the interfaces Ethernet the two serial ports and RF and Airlink Error Detection statistics Figure 68 Diagnostics Interface Statistics Di tic Interface Remote SNMP Online agnostics Statistics Statistics BET ao 2 1n n Port Name RX Pkts 30271161 TX Pkts 28880313 Rx 9002 Rx Ctrl 25555 Tx 311574 Rx Data 9162 Tx Ctrl 26347 Tx Data 38504 Reliable Service Msg Success Count 6265 Reliable Service Msg Failure Count 5 Total Retry Count 20 Noise Detected Count 213 Rx Total Other Count 0 Refresh Clear Zero Interface Stats The Interface Statistics tab report
159. evel The current transmit power level setting PA Forward Power The transmit power measured during the last transmission PA Reverse Power The reverse power measured during the last transmission Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 42 Bandwidth Bit Rate and Modulation Displays the Bandwidth and the Bit Rate and Modulation for the configured channel When applicable separate Bit Rates and Modulation will be displayed for the Data Packet and Control Packet Multi Speed Mode When Multi Speed mode is enabled the units communicate with each other at a fixed speed A unit can be set to operate as a Multi Speed Master or as a Multi Speed Slave A unit set to operate in Multi Speed slave mode matches the speed of the unit set to operate in Multi Speed Master mode In a network operating with Multi Speed there must be at most one Multi Speed Master unit and all other units must operate in Multi Speed Slave mode The Multi Speed Mode can be configured in RF Network Settings RF Network Mode Indicates the mode of operation ANSI ANSI 900 ETSI Refresh Click Refresh to update the information displayed in the current tab 4 1 3 BASIC SETTINGS The Basic Settings tab is the third right most tab of the Home page of the Viper Web interface To navigate to this tab select Home from the main navigation menu or click Home and click Basic Settings In this tab you can make basic configuration sett
160. evice or its immediate Ethernet LAN enters the VPN Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 112 Destination IP Filter Controls which traffic to the given IP address or range enters the VPN Examples with Netmask 255 255 255 255 e Source IP address 172 30 51 3 allows packets only from the specified LAN IP address into the VPN e Source IP address 0 0 0 0 allows packets from any LAN IP address into the VPN This is useful when LAN devices sending via the VPN are behind routers usually the case for a VPN server connected to a backhaul network Note The Netmask for each IP address controls whether it is a single address or a subnet range Examples 255 255 255 255 restricts the IP address range to the specified value 255 255 255 0 allows the last part of the IP address to range from 1 to 254 0 and 255 are reserved Source defaults 0 0 0 0 server allow any source LAN subnet client allow any local source Destination default 0 0 0 0 allow any destination Source Destination Ports The source and destination TCP UDP port number ranges are used to select which packets are sent via the VPN based on application type Source Port filter Controls which traffic from the VPN device or its immediate Ethernet LAN enters the VPN Destination Port Filter Controls which traffic to the given TCP UDP port or range enters the VPN Examples Destination ports O to 0 allows packets to any port D
161. ey settings are not affected It is recommended to select one of these buttons as the first step in configuring the VPN service Automatic Start The VPN service can be set to start automatically at startup or not to Enabled Start the VPN service at startup Disabled Do not start the VPN service automatically at startup The default setting is Enabled Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 110 Operating Mode The Viper may be configured to operate as a VPN server or VPN client See specific disclaimers below Server Sets the Viper to operate as a VPN Server Viper must be configured as an RF Access Point Client Sets the Viper to operate as a VPN Client Must be configured as a non Access Point on RF The default setting is Client Notes An Access Point connects to the backhaul via its Ethernet port After changing this setting click Apply to apply the new setting and refresh the page Block non VPN Traffic Available on VPN servers only The Viper can be set to block or allow non VPN traffic Enabled The VPN service blocks all packets from the RF link that were not sent via a VPN tunnel Disabled Non matching traffic is not blocked The default setting is Enabled Notes This setting is especially useful for blocking devices that are not configured for VPN operation from sending packets to the backhaul network A VPN server automaticall
162. f Pages Secondary Name Server OF OF 0 0 Protocol Control BOOTP Enable DHCP Enable Msg Connection Timeout x 175 1 FOOO SNMP Server Enable SMTP Client Enable Msg Reply Timeout x 1m 10000 HTTP Server Enable Inactivity Timeout x Min 30 i Auto Negotiate Port Setting 10 100 Mbps Full D uplex Half Duplex When the polling interval is longer CIP Forward Open and CIP Forward Close messages add 4 extra messages on air between each unit polled In each poll is 2 messages message and reply therefore the 4 extra messages increase the on air message load by 200 96 For example a system is set up for the PLC to poll the remote PLCs every 120 seconds and is set to wait for the next poll loop if polling is not completed after the 120 seconds therefore the loop becomes 240 seconds Take the 240 seconds and divide it by 8 which gives 30 seconds Set the Message Reply timeout on Channel 1 to 30000 milliseconds or 32000 ms is some margin is required More about Message Reply Timeout The Message Reply timeout is also used for retransmission of messages in case there is no reply Since TCP connection is used the retransmissions are normally not required Therefore with TCP longer timeouts within reason are okay The Message Reply timeout on Channel 1 settings of the PLC should be set to the value determined by the previous example and since traffic is on air and is retried and the TCP driver performs its ow
163. fault setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID 0 If incoming packets have a VLAN ID set to zero 0 you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag the packets with the PVID or delete their tag The default setting is to silently drop the packet Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 82 VID PVID The packet has a VLAN ID that is the same as the PVID If incoming packets have a VLAN ID that is the same as the PVID you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or delete their tag The default setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID but VID is in Table If incoming packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID but is in the VLAN Member Table you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged retag the packets or delete their tags The default setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID and VID is not in Table If incoming packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID and is not in the VLAN Member Table you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag the packets or delete their tags The default setting is to keep the packet unchanged Egress Packet Untagged The packet has no VLAN ID tag If exiting packets are untagged you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or tag them with PVID The defa
164. fferent mode All Vipers in a radio network must be set the same The Tx Power setting allows you to increase or decrease the transmit power as required Bandwidth kHz Data Packet Bit Rate kbps and Control Packet Bit Rate kbps These settings are computed from the Channel size and frequency range Carrier Sense Level Threshold dBm The threshold Viper uses to determine whether a received RF signal is a valid message or unwanted noise If RF level above the threshold is detected the Viper will not transmit data Signals are received and decoded Outgoing data is buffered until the channel becomes available Threshold may be raised to prevent false detection in radio noisy environments or lowered to gain extra receive sensitivity Lower thresholds should only be used when ambient RF noise is very low Receive sensitivity depends on the channel bandwidth and speed being used Refer to Specifications for the Carrier sense by model The default setting is 110 dBm Listen Before Transmit The Viper can be configured to listen on the Rx frequency and determines if the RF channel is available The channel is available as long as the received level is lower than the carrier sense threshold When the channel is busy Viper receives and decodes all remote messages Outgoing data is buffered and sent when the channel becomes available The default setting is Enabled listen to data only Three options are available for Listen Before Transmit e Enabl
165. fied If the keepalive message is received successfully by the remote endpoint the TCP connection will remain open If the keepalive message is not received successfully the Viper will close the existing TCP connection To disable this feature set the TCP keepalive to O zero With the TCP keepalive feature disabled the Viper will leave the TCP connection open indefinitely An existing TCP connection will only close if the remote endpoint closes the connection or if the Viper is unable to successfully communicate with the remote endpoint during a data transmission UDP Auto Response When sending a UDP packet do not use the remote port and remote IP address configured but rather sent to the IP address and port number of the last UDP packet received When this feature is enabled any packet to be transmitted is dropped until at least one packet has been received UDP Local Copy When the socket operates in UDP mode and the remote address is a multicast or limited broadcast address the packet can be sent out without giving a copy to internal applications Local Copy enabled means a copy of the packet is sent to internal applications Local Copy disabled means do not send a copy of the packet to internal applications Status Status of the TCP Server mode may display as down or listening N TCP Clients up Status of the TCP Client mode may display as down connecting or up Status of UDP may display as down or up Viper SC IP Router for
166. for packets coming from the Ethernet interface The user can specify filters to classify the packets coming from the Ethernet interface into any of these five remaining RF transmit queues All seven transmit queues can be configured for minimum guaranteed bit rate maximum bit rate and maximum amount of packets the queue can hold Packets generated by the Viper itself are sent into a hidden RF transmit queue called the control transmit queue which is not listed in the QoS tab and does not have any configurable options In this queue packets are transmitted over the RF interface in FCFS first come first served order Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 68 Figure 42 RF Network Settings QoS RF Network R _ RF Bandwidth Settin gs Yetwork Management QoS Enabled Disabled Default LAN Queue co LAM Queue 1 Ro ca LAN Queue 2 LAN Queue 3 LAN Queue 4 ca LAN Queue 5 Com Port nmn sss Setup Port Restore QoS Defaults Save Cancel VLANID O 04094 0 Any NN Source Port O 0 65535 0 Any Destination IP Address o Destination Port 0 65535 0 Any Any OoOther 0 0 63 Protocol TCP ACK Only Tranamit Queue DSCP Add Cancel Delete All If you Save changes te any parameters marked PN you wil need te reset the unit for them to take effect QOS Enable or Disable Enable or disable the QoS Quality of Service module
167. g in the radio and damage components in the transmitter and receiver circuitry 2 5 4 GOOD DESIGN PRACTICES There are two relatively easy ways to avoid creating large transients due to static buildup on an antenna and the subsequent firing of the gas discharge tube in the lightning arrestor Following either or both of the recommendations below will eliminate this potential problem 1 Use antennas with a DC grounded active element Antennas can easily be tested by using an ohm meter to measure the resistance from the center conductor to the ground of the RF cable that is directly attached to the antenna The ohm meter should indicate a short Some antenna designs such as folded dipole or folded dipole Yagi antennas inherently have a DC ground on the active element due to the nature of the antenna design 2 Use a lightning arrestor that does not have a gas discharge tube PolyPhaser makes several DC blocked lightning arrestors that have an inductor to ground instead of a gas tube These lightning arrestors will not allow the static to build up on the antenna and there is no gas tube that can trigger causing a transient into the antenna port of the radio The following lightning arrestors manufactured by PolyPhaser have inductors to ground instead of gas tubes a PolyPhaser Part Number VHF50HN Frequency Range 100MHz 512MHz 750W b PolyPhaser Part Number TSX NFF Frequency Range 700MHz 2 7GHz 750W Tip Lightning arrestors t
168. gateway WAN access of a Viper network One and only one access point may be defined for each Viper network All Vipers in the network will set their default route to point to the Access Point Viper can only be configured as an Access point if it is operating in Router mode The default setting is No the Viper will not be operating as an Access Point Relay Point Select whether this Viper will operate as a Relay Point For Vipers that are spread over multiple RF coverage areas the user needs to identify the units that will form the backbone between the coverage areas so that any unit can talk to any other unit in the network regardless of their locations The units forming the backbone between the coverage areas are the Relay Point units Selecting this parameter will force the unit to repeat all necessary information from one coverage area to the next The default setting is No the Viper will not be operating as a Relay Point Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 51 Multi Speed Mode Select whether Multi Speed Mode will be disabled or enabled When Multi Speed Mode is disabled the default setting the units communicate with each other at a fixed data rate Refer to APPENDIX B for data rates by model By enabling Multi Speed Mode the Viper can be set to operate as a rate follower to match the speed of the Base unit set to operate as the rate controller This means the Viper will adjust to the over the a
169. ginates from the Ethernet network and is sent towards the RF network will have its source IP address replaced by the RF IP address of the Viper 1 as shown in the following figure Figure 86 Private to Public Packet Flow Private Network RF Network Public Network Packet 1 Packet 1 Packet 1 Source Address 192 168 205 2 Source Address 10 0 14 203 Source Address 10 0 14 203 Destination Address 172 31 5 2 Destination Address 172 31 5 2 Destination Address 172 31 5 2 Host 1 Host 2 Eth 192 168 205 2 Eth 172 31 5 2 Viper 1 NAT Enabled 192 168 205 24 Viper 2 NAT Disabled Ethernet Private Host 1 will be able to ping Host 2 however Host 2 will not be able to ping or originate a message to Host 1 with NAT Eth enabled Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 161 RF INTERFACE PRIVATE The following figure shows NAT enabled for the RF interface Figure 87 NAT Enabled RF Interface Private Router Routing Table NAT VTS NAT Enabled Disabled ETH 192 168 205 0 255 255 255 RF 10 0 0 0 USERI USER2 USER3 Clear Table Save Cancel If you Save changes te any parameters marked db you wil need to reset the unit for them te take effect The preceding figure shows the Viper configured to protect the Viper 2 RF interface and Viper 1 Ethernet interface from hosts located on a public network The following figure shows what this looks like Figure 88
170. gs indicated by a yellow alert symbol AX in the Viper Setup Wizard require a reset of the Viper before they will take effect When you have finished with the Viper Setup Wizard it will be necessary to reset the Viper to restart with the new configuration settings made in the Setup Wizard When you have read the information provided on the Welcome page carefully click Quit to exit or click Next to proceed to Step 1 on the following page Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 34 3 7 1 SETUP WIZARD STEP 1 STATION NAME AND MODE SETTINGS The page for Step 1 of the Viper Setup Wizard allows you to set the Station Name the IP Forwarding Mode whether the Viper will function as a Relay Point an Access Point and whether Multi Speed Mode will be enabled Figure 20 Viper Setup Wizard Step 1 Viper Setup Wizard For easy network maintenance each station receives a unique name Station Name Viper_Remote l Bridge mode is recommended for very simple network topologies Router mode covers all kinds of network topologies simple and complex IP Forwarding Mode Bridge Router Helay Points are used for relaying broadcast information and for forwarding on line diagnostics to AP DG They must be carefully selected as to reduce traffic in the network Relay Point Yes 9Mo Access Point This is the default gateway VV AM access of a Viper network One and only one access point may be defined for each Vip
171. gs in this tab Refresh Click Refresh to reload the tab with the settings currently in effect 4 6 1 1 ADVANCED SETTINGS FOR SERIAL COM PORT OR SETUP PORT When you click Show to show the advanced settings in the COM Port or Setup Port tab for the Serial page the tab expands downward to show the advanced settings The following figure shows the Advanced Settings section of the Serial COM Port tab The Advanced Settings section of the Serial Setup Port tab contains the same options in the IP Gateway Service Settings section as the COM Port tab but the Setup Port tab does not have the RTS CTS mode settings section below Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 93 Figure 57 Serial COM Port or Setup Port tab showing Advanced Settings only Advanced Settings Show Hide O CU Serice O Serial RF bridge DOX mode IP Gateway Service Serial RF bridge RTS CTS mode Online Diagnostics 9 Custom IP Gateway Transport TCP Server w Local IP Address Automatic Local Port Number Remote IP Address Remote Port Number TCP Keepalive 0 m inutes CTS assertion delay ms CTS negation delay ms Send all buffered data before negating CTS Fragment large messages Discard all buffered data when entering flow control Cancel Refresh If you Save changes bo any parameters marked FN you wil need to reset the unit for them to take effect The Advanced Settings p
172. hat use gas tubes will normally specify a Turn On Voltage in the data sheet If you see this specification in the datasheet it is very likely that the lightning arrestor has a gas discharge tube If you are still unsure contact the manufacturer 2 6 SELECTING ANTENNA AND FEEDLINE Viper can be used with a variety of antenna types The exact style used depends on the physical size and layout Viper has been tested and approved with antennas having a maximum gain of 10 dBi Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 23 2 6 1 ANTENNA GAIN Antenna gain is usually measured in comparison to a dipole A dipole acts much like the filament of a flashlight bulb it radiates energy in almost all directions One bulb like this would provide very dim room lighting Add a reflector capable of concentrating all the energy into a narrow angle of radiation and you have a flashlight Within that bright spot on the wall the light might be a thousand times greater than it would be without the reflector The resulting bulb reflector combination has a gain of 1000 or 30 dB compared to the bulb alone Gain can be achieved by concentrating the energy both vertically and horizontally as in the case of the flashlight and Yagi antenna Gain can be also be achieved by reducing the vertical angle of radiation leaving the horizontal alone In this case the antenna will radiate equally in all horizontal directions but will take energy th
173. he VLAN ID as a number between 1 and 4094 inclusive and then click this button The VLAN ID is added to the VLAN Member Table in the section below Delete VLAN ID From Table To remove a VLAN ID enter the VLAN ID as a number between 1 and 4094 inclusive that is displayed in the VLAN Member Table in the section below and then click this button The VLAN ID is removed from the table Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 83 Clear Table To delete all VLAN ID entries from the VLAN Member Table from the section below at once click this button The VLAN Member Table section of the tab displays table empty This section of the RF Network Settings VLAN tab displays Member VLANs in table form as defined using the fields and buttons in the above section In no table entries exist table empty is displayed Note If you made a change to the Mode Port VLAN ID or Member of Management VLAN setting above in this tab as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect 4 4 6 ETHERNET PHY Ethernet PHY is the sixth right most tab of the LAN Settings page To navigate to this tab select LAN Settings form the main menu and click Ethernet PHY PHY is an abbreviation for the physical layer of the OSI model For this reason an Ethernet transceiver is often called a PHYceiver It is a component that operates at the physical layer of
174. he five channel bandwidths The fastest speeds utilize 16 level FSK frequency shift keying The slower speeds in each bandwidth utilize 2 4 and 8 level FSK yielding a higher signal to noise level resulting in better sensitivity When the received RF signal level is strong the system is able to utilize faster bit rates However if the system has a low RF signal level or the RF signal levels are close to an elevated noise floor level you can run at slower over the air speed for the system s bandwidth It may result in better overall performance Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 130 5 2 3 USE DATA RETRIES Increase Data Retries in the Viper Web Interface in the RF Network Settings RF Bandwidth Management tab When data retries are enabled the receiving Viper will reply with a very short RF Acknowledge message each time a unicast data packet is received correctly The RF Acknowledge allows the transmitting Viper to verify that the packet was received successfully This does however add a small amount of latency to each packet reducing overall throughput If the transmitting Viper does not receive an RF Acknowledge it will retransmit the message again up to the maximum number of data retries specified 5 2 4 USE COLLISION AVOIDANCE Enable Collision Avoidance in the Viper Web Interface in the RF Network Settings RF Bandwidth Management tab When enabled the Collision Avoidance feature will
175. he format DD EE FF MTU Maximum Transfer Unit This value represents the maximum number of bytes the Viper will send in a packet Enter a value from 576 to 1500 The default value is 1500 Save Click Save to save any changes you have made to settings in this tab See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note If you change the IP Forwarding Mode Access Point RF IP Address RF Netmask RF MAC Address or MTU settings in this tab as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 52 4 3 2 RF BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT RF Bandwidth Management is the second from left tab of the RF Network Settings page To navigate to this tab select RF Network Settings from the main menu and click RF Bandwidth Management In this tab you can make configuration settings for RF contention TCP Proxy Duplicate Packet Removal and Bridge Forwarding and Transmit Packet Pacing Figure 33 RF Network Settings RF Bandwidth Management RF Network Settings F RF Bandwidth Neighbor Glol etwork Management Table R N Data e e el a e er ee Retries OFF 1 2 3 5 10 Custom OFF 512 256 128 64 0 Custom random O O O O O O Backoff am SSeS NI OFF 2 i 8 10 Custom Minimum Latency Minimum Conges
176. he packet originated from the RF network Figure 90 RF Interface Private Host 1 Host 2 Eth 192 168 205 2 Eth 172 31 5 2 Viper 1 NAT Disabled Viper 2 NAT Enabled RF Private RF 10 0 14 203 Eth 192 168 205 1 RF 10 0 14 186 Eth 172 31 5 1 Private RF Network Public Network Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 163 Figure 91 Packet Flow RF Interface Private Public Network Packet 1 Source Address 192 168 20 Destination Address 172 31 5 2 5 2 Private RF Network Packet 1 Source Address 192 168 205 2 Destination Address 172 31 5 2 Source Address 192 168 20 Destination Address 172 31 Packet 1 5 2 9 2 Host 1 Host 2 Eth 192 168 205 2 Eth 172 31 5 2 Viper 1 NAT Disabled Viper 2 NAT Enabled RF Private The above figure shows that when Host 1 sends a packet the source IP address is not changed by Viper 2 because the source does not originate from the private RF network Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 164 USER NAT ENTRIES The user can add three 3 User IP addresses that will be considered private The following figure shows User1 IP address 192 168 205 125 and User 2 IP address 192 168 205 90 will be considered private If User 3 whose IP address is 192 168 205 87 is connected to the Viper but not added to the table User 3 192 168 205 87 would not be considered private Figure 92 User 1 an
177. he section below Delete VLAN ID From Table To remove a VLAN ID enter the VLAN ID as a number between 1 and 4094 inclusive that is displayed in the VLAN Member Table in the section below and then click this button The VLAN ID is removed from the table Clear Table To delete all VLAN ID entries from the VLAN Member Table from the section below at once click this button The VLAN Member Table section of the tab displays table empty This section of the RF Network Settings VLAN tab displays Member VLANs in table form as defined using the fields and buttons in the above section In no table entries exist table empty is displayed Note If you made a change to the Port VLAN ID or Member of Management VLAN setting above in this tab as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect 4 3 6 QOS QoS Quality of Service is the sixth from left tab of the RF Network Settings page To navigate to this tab select RF Network Settings from the main menu and click QoS This tab allows you to make QoS configuration settings for the RF Network Up to seven 7 transmit queues can be used to classify the packets before they are actually transmitted over the RF interface Two of the RF transmit queues are used for packets coming from the serial ports of the Viper one per serial port one for COM and one for SETUP The remaining five 5 RF transmit queues are used
178. hen sending WCP messages If auto response is enabled this parameter is not used Auto Response When sending a WCP message UDP do not use the remote port and remote IP address configured but rather send to the IP address and port number of the last WCP message received When this feature is enabled drop any message to transmit until at least one message is received Note If you change the Multicast Group or Local Port in the IP Setting section in this tab a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A Forward WC Traffic to RF network Enable or disable forwarding traffic for the Wing Commander protocol onto the RF network The default setting is Enabled Note If you change the Forward WC Traffic to RF network Enabled or Disabled a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect as indicated by the yellow alert symbol Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 128 Queued Files table 0 The WCP client supports up to five 5 simultaneous file downloads This table lists the status of each uploaded file Server IP Address of the server uploading the file Filename Filename of the file being uploaded Size Size of the file being uploaded Handle A unique handle with which the server identifies this file Blocks A file upload is broken up into blocks and the block size is under contro
179. his document For website downloads http www ab com linked programmablecontrol plc micrologix downloads html MicroLogix 1100 series B FRN 4 and above are Series B MicroLogix 1100 series B before FRN 10 require to be upgraded to FRN 10 released MicroLogix 1400 series A MicroLogix 1400 series A before FRN 6 require to be upgraded to FRN 6 or 7 released MicroLogix 1400 series B MicroLogix 1400 series B before FRN 11 require to be upgraded to FRN 11 released For other MicroLogix models please contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 187 ALLEN BRADLEY CONTROLLOGIX AND COMPACTLOGICS PLC FOR VIPER SYSTEM This guide is intended to assist with Allen Bradley CompactLogix and ControlLogix communication setup between master PLC and remote PLC using AB Ethernet IP TCP protocol between PLCs PLC communication via serial lines or serial terminal server is not covered here nevertheless some information may be applicable Note Please consult the Viper General PLC setup earlier in this appendix for important information about setting up systems with PLCs ALLEN BRADLEY COMPACTLOGIX AND CONTROLLOGIX PLCS Following are important settings recommended to improve communications when used with a limited bandwidth Viper network This provides more specific information that supplements the general PLC communication information presented earlier in this appen
180. his page and then click Next to proceed to step 2 on the following page Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 35 3 7 2 SETUP WIZARD STEP 2 NETWORK IP SETTINGS The page for Step 2 of the Viper Setup Wizard allows you to set the IP address Network Mask and Default Gateway for the Viper Figure 21 Viper Setup Wizard Step 2 Viper Setup Wizard If you keep the default IP address on all units on your network they will be accessible via their local Ethernet port To monitor or change configurations remotely each unit needs a unique IP address This will be the address that you will point your browser to access these pages in the future Changing this address will not affect your application data but the address shall not be used elsewhere in your network Enter a unique IP address for the unit If you will be administering it from a different IP subnet enter the Default Gateway for this network You do not need to set a Default Gateway if you will only be connecting to your Vipers from the same IP subnet IP Address 192 168 205 1 default 192 168 205 1 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 default 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Cancel Note The db symbol indicates that this parameter will require a Reset before it takes effect Enter an IP Address Network Mask and Default Gate way for the Viper if applicable The default IP Address is 192 168 205 1 The default Network
181. his tab select Device Maintenance from the main menu Figure 75 Device Maintenance Config Control Device Maintenance Config Control Package Control Wing Commander Save Configuration using this name ip Q Import Configuration from i bridge mode high reliability drp Delete Configuration Q Merge settings bundled in upgrade package with current configuration Q Restore Factory Settings Po Froceed Cancel Note Some operations may take a minute or so to complete Operatiens marked iy will require you to perform a Reset Unit after a successful completian Config Control allows you to save backup configuration settings and restore configuration settings from saved or backup configuration files to the Viper The following chapters about using CalAmp provided and cloned Viper configurations and upgrading firmware explain possible additional practical applications for controls in this tab Save Configuration using this name This option saves the current user configuration settings in the Viper to the user specified file Valid characters for the file name are a z A Z 0 9 and All Viper configuration files must have a drp extension A missing or invalid file name will cause an Invalid Entry message to pop up To save the user configuration settings to a file click the radio button and enter a file name and then click Proceed Import Configuration from or Delete Configuratio
182. hrenheit VLAN Mode Enabled Disabled VLAN Mode4 Enabled Disabled Management vitan4 amp C Enabled Disabled Management vLan C Enabled Disabled Management VLAN wA 1 1 4094 Management VLAN wA 1 1 4094 Save Cancel Save Cancel jroadcast LAr 2 roadcas Broad VLAN Ethernet PHY LAN Settings DHCP SNTP 5 VLAN Ethernet PHY Settings LAN Settings Serings DHCP SNTP Multicast Mode Untagged Tagged Port VLAN ID 1 PVID 1 4094 Member Of Management irs Mode Untagged Tagged Port VLAN ID 1 PVID 1 4094 Member Of Management is D Enabled Disabled D Enabled X Disabled Advanced Settings 2 Show 9 Hide Advanced Settings 2 Show 9 Hide Save Cancel RF Network R RF Bandv dth Neighbor vum RF Network Settings work M gs c Settings Save Cancel Mode Tagged Port VLAN ID 1 PVID 1 4094 Member Of Management E s Mode Tagged Port VLAN ID 1 PVID 1 4094 Member Of Management VLAN D Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Advanced Settings 2 Show Hide Advanced Settings 2 Show 9 Hide Save Cancel Save Cancel Eth A RF Eth B Host A Host B 192 168 1 1 24 192 168 1 2 24 192 168 1 254 24 192 168 1 253 24 Example Host A C V ping 192 168 1 2 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 175 Eth A RF Eth B Echo Request
183. ht saving time have been configured correctly Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab 4 4 4 BROADCAST MULTICAST Broadcast Multicast is the fourth from left tab in the LAN Settings page To navigate to this tab select LAN Settings from the main menu and click Broadcast Multicast This tab allows you to set parameters for Broadcast and Multicast from the Viper Figure 47 LAN Settings Broadcast Multicast su ees DHCP SNTP eder VLA Settings m Directed Broadcast Enabled Disabled Limited Broadcast Enabled 9 Disabled Multicast Forwarding Enabled Disabled Multicast to Broadcast The MREtolAN 0c25t O Enabled 9Disabled Group Range 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Group Range 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 Group Range 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 Group Range 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 Group Range 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Group1 0 0 0 0 Group 2 0 0 0 Group3 0 0 0 0 Group4 0 0 0 0 Group5 0000 Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked PN you wil need to reset the unit for them to take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 77 Directed Broadcast This parameter controls the forwarding of directed broadcast packets from the LAN interface to the RF interface Directed Broadcast is enabled by default Limited Broadcast This parameter controls the forwarding of limited broad
184. ii When mounting the Viper in a NEMA enclosure care must be taken to mount the radio in such a way so that the coaxial feedline cables are not kinked or have tight bends Kinks or tight bends can cause SWR issues and damage the cable Viper base stations i Rack mount base stations should allow for easy access to the top and rear when practical for ease of maintenance ii The base station should be mounted in such a way that prevents the feedline coaxial cable from kinking or having tight bends in the cables Kinks or tight bends can cause SWR issues and damage the cable 3 PolyPhaser lightning surge protection d It is extremely important to ensure that the correct type of lightning surge protector device is used This will be based on the type of antenna being used grounded or not grounded Although the antenna specification sheet may indicate the antenna is grounded this may not be completely true Please refer to Section 2 5 Selecting Antenna and Lightning Arrestor combinations earlier in this Viper SC User Manual for the recommended combination of antenna and surge protection devices to use Failure to install the correct type of lightning protection device may result in the failure of the Viper s transmitter RF driver and final power devices All lightning protection devices must be grounded in order for the device to provide protection for the equipment Please refer to the manufacturer s recommended grounding instructions For
185. in access to the unit If you lose your password you will need to contact CalAmp for technical support Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 102 New Password Confirm Re enter the new password string you entered above Save Click Save to save any new user name or password changes you have made in this tab You will need to enter your new password the next time you log in to the Viper Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made in this tab 4 7 2 AES ENCRYPTION AES Advanced Encryption Standard is the second from left tab of the Security page To navigate to this tab select Security from the main menu and click AES Encryption This tab allows you to enable or disable AES Encryption and set the Encryption Pass Phrase Figure 62 Security AES Encryption AES Radius Encryption ta Cancel If you Save changes te any parameters marked FN you wil need to reset the unit for them te take effect Encryption When enabled Viper uses AES 128 bit encryption to protect your data from eavesdropping and to prevent intruders from changing your configuration Use of encryption is optional but we strongly recommend it for actual networks The default setting is disabled Encryption Pass Phrase If encryption is enabled enter a string of characters used to create an AES 128 bit encryption key The pass phrase can be up to 160 characters
186. indow Description RF MAC Address RF IP Address Ethernet IP Address Attributes Discovery Mode Remote 60 00 05 10 128 0 3 24 10 88 50 33 23 RP PXY Unknown Hop Count i Next Hop 80 00 03 Active Hop Count Next Hop Toggle Primary Backup Hautes Save RFIP Address and Ethernet IP Address This Neighbor Discovery module uses this information to build the routing table RSSI dBm The RSSI is logged for all units that are only one 1 hop away For units more than one hop away or unreachable the RSSI is not logged Route to Neighboring Vipers Hop Count and Next Hop Indicates the route by which the remote unit can be reached When the Hop Count is one 1 the device can be reached directly When the Hop Count is more than one 1 it can be reached by passing through another Viper as identified by the Next Hop Entry Type There are three types of entries Static This entry has been defined by the user The entry type can only be removed by the user This entry cannot be replaced by a Dynamic or locked entry Static neighbor entries can be added in any neighbor discover mode If the Save button is clicked all Static neighbor entries are saved in nonvolatile memory They are restored to the table after a reboot Dynamic A Dynamic neighbor entry is any one that has been learned by the Neighbor Discovery module It can be updated or deleted by the Neighbor Discovery modu
187. information Added information and specifications for Viper SC 200 Added information about V1 7 Viper SC firmware release Corrected radio firmware upgrade command line instructions errors in Section 13 3 that were introduced in revision 7 of the user manual Added section about VPN Added section about RADIUS Updated SNMP section Updated screen captures and descriptions 9 September 2010 Rebranded for Viper SC Updates to Security VPN Section 4 5 3 10 August 2011 Added VT ETSI Viper part numbers and ETSI Base Station part numbers Section 1 5 Added sensitivity numbers for VHF ETSI Viper Appendix A Added additional regulatory certifications for VHF ETSI Viper Appendix B Updated VHF ETSI frequencies from 136 174 MHz to 142 174 MHz Added frequency ranges for ETSI and AS NZ compliant models in section 1 2 Rearranged model number layout in Appendix A Added standards information to Appendix B Updated RF Exposure Compliance Recommendations Updated Unit Identification and Status mode selection section 4 1 1 Updated Diagnostics Info SNR from RF MAC section 4 1 2 Channel Table Current Settings mode selection changed section 4 3 3 Multicast section updated section 4 4 2 IP Optimization updates section 4 4 4 VPN Configuration updates section 4 5 3 Remote Statistics added section 4 6 3 SINAD Meter added to RF Tests section 4 7 5 11 August 2011 Updated EU and EFTA Member States Acceptable Frequency Table in Appendix
188. ings in the Viper router Figure 28 Home Basic Settings Unit Status RF Status Basic Settings Station Name Power Management Disable Auto Reset Enabled 9 Disabled Unit Reset Interval 11440 minutes minimum 10 minutes 9 Celsius Q Fahrenheit VLAN Mode Enabled 9 Disabled Management VLAN S Enabled 9 Disabled Management VLAN ID aoo 1 4094 Temperature Setting Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked you will need to reset the unit for them to take effect Station Name This is the user defined name given to the unit to differentiate it from other units and used by various services Enter a name up to forty 40 characters in length that is unique different from the names assigned to other units on the network Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 43 Power Management When enabled power management will allow the unit to go into a low power mode when the ignition sense is off when the white wire is disconnected from the red wire or B supply The default setting is disabled Auto Reset Auto Reset allows you to set a time duration after which the unit will automatically reset itself This is disabled by default Unit Reset Interval If Auto Reset is Enabled enter the number of minutes after each power up ten minutes minimum the unit should be up between resets The default setting is disabled Temperature Setting Sel
189. ings you have made in this page and then click Next to proceed to the Step 5 on the final page of the Viper Setup Wizard 3 7 5 SETUP WIZARD STEP 5 COMPLETION AND RESET The final page for Step 5 of the Viper Setup Wizard informs you that you have completed the Viper Setup Wizard Figure 24 Viper Setup Wizard Step 5 Viper Setup Wizard You have completed the Viper setup Wizard Do not forget to restart the station by clicking Reset for the new settings to take effect Previous You may use the Previous button to return to previous pages of the Setup Wizard to review configuration settings but some changed settings will not take effect unless the Viper is reset powered down and restarted Click the Reset link to reset the Viper router or click Done and then reset the Viper router Some settings indicated by a yellow alert symbol AX made on earlier pages of the Viper Setup Wizard require a reset of the Viper before they will take effect Click Reset at this time to reset the Viper to restart with the configuration settings made in the Setup Wizard Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 38 4 VIPER SC WEB INTERFACE All operating parameters of the Viper SC are set through a web interface in your web browser once you have logged in The built in web server of the Viper SC makes configuration and status monitoring possible from any computer with network access to the Viper either
190. iper Modem Firmware code This must be updated every time a software upgrade is required Radio Firmware code This code resides on the Viper SC transceiver PC board and requires the user to manually perform the upgrade process Note Radio Firmware code does not need to be upgraded each time the Modem Firmware code is upgraded Figure 79 Device Maintenance Package Control DATARADIO Viper HW PCB 280 03470 CodeBase ipr 3 6 R201307162030 Radio Firmware Version FIRM 03 10 R Modem Firmware Version Radio Firmware Upgrade 200 Package Name distrib pkg 00 Minor 6 J00 Major 3 00 Package distrib pkg is valid Result PASS 7 2 HOW THE VIPER FIRMWARE IS UPGRADED The Viper firmware code is upgraded by uploading new files into the radio using a FTP File Transport Protocol program or by using any FTP utility session If using FTP we recommend using a program such as FTP Commander FTP Commander is available as a demo version program and can be downloaded from http www internet soft com ftpsoftware htm For information on performing an upgrade refer to the applicable Support Bulletins on our website at http www calamp com support 7 2 1 UPGRADE THE MODEM FIRMWARE Very Important Hardware Versions There are earlier hardware versions for the Viper radio Viper SC and SC and pre SC Each version requires a different version of the modem firmware Note You cannot load modem firmware for the Viper SC
191. ir data rate to that of the rate controller Only Viper Base Station units can be configured as a rate controller RF IP Address The RF IP address is the IP address used when sending data and control packets on the Viper radio network The default RF IP address will have the form 10 x y z where x y and z are based on the last six digits of the unit s Ethernet MAC address RF Netmask Set the RF Netmask to a valid common RF IP netmask for all units on the network The default is 255 0 0 0 RF MAC Address The RF MAC Address is a shortened version of the Ethernet MAC address which is used to identify the Viper RF interface to other Vipers on the network The default RF MAC address is assigned by the factory and is equal to the last six digits of the Ethernet MAC address DD EE FF While users cannot change the Ethernet MAC address they may enter a new RF MAC address for the device The RF MAC address must be unique for each Viper in the network When the network is configured for router mode this feature is useful when replacing a Viper in the field with a new one The new Viper can be programmed to have the same RF MAC Ethernet IP Address and RF IP Address as the Viper that is being replaced When the new Viper is installed neighboring Vipers in the network will not know the original Viper was replaced Neighboring Vipers will not need to have their neighbor tables updated The default setting is to use the default RF MAC address displayed in t
192. is option is set you can select Manual Scan Auto Scan or Disabled for all Vipers To save this change to the configuration after remote operation place a check in the check box at the right Change TCP Proxy Mode You can change the TCP Proxy mode for all Vipers in the network to enabled or disabled To save this change to the configuration after remote operation place a check in the check box at the right Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 63 Clear Neighbor Table To clear the Neighbor Tables for all Vipers in the network select this setting To save this change to the configuration after remote operation place a check in the check box at the right Save Configuration This will send a Save Configuration command to all Vipers in the network Get Status This will send a Get Status command to all Vipers in the network The status will be displayed in the Neighbor Table tab of the RF Network Settings page Single Station If this check box is checked and the RF MAC Address of a Viper on the network is entered into the field below any other selection made in this tab will apply to the Viper whose RF MAC Address is entered When the box is not checked any setting made in this tab will apply to all Vipers on the network Apply Click Apply to apply any changes you have made to Global Settings Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any settings in this tab 4 3 5 VL
193. is a technique that hides an entire IP address space usually consisting of private network IP addresses behind a single IP address in another often public address space This mechanism is implemented in a routing device that uses stateful translation tables to map the hidden addresses into a single IP address and then readdresses the outgoing Internet Protocol IP packets on exit so that they appear to originate from the router In the reverse communications path responses are mapped back to the originating IP address using the rules state stored in the translation tables As described the method enables communication through the router only when the conversation originates in the masquerading network since this establishes the translation tables For example a web browser in the masqueraded network can browse a website outside but a web browser outside could not browse a web site in the masqueraded network Most NAT devices today allow the network administrator to configure translation table entries for permanent use This feature is often referred to as static NAT or port forwarding and allows traffic originating in the outside network to reach designated hosts in the masqueraded network Figure 83 Basic NAT Operation Packet 1 Packet 1 Source Address 192 168 205 2 source Address 172 31 5 1 5 Destination Address 172 31 5 2 Destination Address 172 31 5 2 172 31 5 1 NAT Enabled Device 172 31 5 2 Packet 1 Packet 2 s
194. isted in the table below between the radiating structure and any person An antenna mounted on a pole or tower is the typical installation and in rare instances a 1 2 RF Exposure Wave whip antenna is used Minimum Safety Distance Antenna Gain mOmopowr Sd l0dBi 15dBi 132 Mi VHF 215 MHz UHF Note t is the responsibility of the user to guarantee compliance with the FCC MPE regulations when operating this device in a way other than described above The installer of this equipment must ensure the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit an RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 25 Viper SC uses a low power radio frequency transmitter The concentrated energy from an antenna may pose a health hazard People should not be in front of the antenna when the transmitter is operating The installer of this equipment must ensure the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit an RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population Recommended safety guidelines for the human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy are contained in the Canadian Safety Code 6 available from Health Canada the Federal Communications Commission FCC Bulletin 65 and the Council of the European Union s Recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public
195. l for the server Shown here is the total number of blocks for this file as well as the number of blocks written received successfully Completed Percent completion of this file upload Cmd Shows the last command received by the WCP client Cleanup Files Click Cleanup Files to clear all entries from the Queued Files Table Save Click Save to save the change if you enable or disable Forward WC Traffic to RF network or change any of the IP settings in this tab See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any change you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note If you change the Forward WC Traffic to RF network Enabled or Disabled or either of the IP Setting in this tab a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect as indicated by the yellow alert symbol Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 129 5 NETWORK OPTIMIZATION 5 1 MAXIMIZING TCP IP THROUGHPUT After optimizing the Viper airlink if there appears to be an unexplained speed loss you can attempt to maximize TCP IP throughput TCP IP throughput can be a challenge to measure as performance is related not only to the RF link but to how well flow control is implemented in the TCP IP stack and each application s design The Viper SC has been optimized with this in mind When the Tx Rx LED flashes green or red this indicates data is moving across the network It also indicates by
196. lAmp provides wireless data communication solutions for the telemetry and asset tracking markets private wireless networks railroad Positive Train Control PTC radio transceivers public safety communications and critical infrastructure and process control applications For additional information please visit the Cal mp website www calamp com
197. lable on VPN servers only This parameter is a factor multiplier for tuning VPN maintenance operations It affects the frequency of server status packets idle probes and key exchange retries see explanations of these settings earlier for details This number should be set higher if key exchanges are occurring more frequently than the Key Timeout setting see the VPN Status and Statistics section Notes Only change this value by small amounts 1 5 seconds Default 10 seconds Minimum 2 seconds Maximum 30 seconds Server IP Addresses Available on VPN clients only The IP address es of one or more VPN servers Note When the VPN Server Status Frequency setting is zero default each of its clients must be set with that server s RF IP address Otherwise this is optional clients will discover the server s IP address These filters provide criteria used to select which packets are sent via VPN tunnels Packets passing inside VPN tunnels are protected with strong encryption Traffic not matching these filters is discarded when the Block non VPN Traffic is enabled default Otherwise it is forwarded as is unencrypted Note Appropriate filters are automatically set when selecting the Set Client Server Defaults buttons Source Destination IP Address and Netmask The source and destination IP addresses are used to select which packet are sent via VPN tunnels Source IP filter Controls which traffic from the VPN d
198. last and enter all mandatory parameters All selections must be within specified ranges You may go back and forward as you please using Previous and Next buttons No page may be left without filling mandatory parameters You may quit the wizard at any time by clicking Quit When unsure of your modifications you may revert to last applied known values of any page by clicking Cancel Setup Wi d sun alioi When you are satisfied with all current selections you must restart the station by clicking Reset for changes to take effect num The Setup Wizard consists of five 5 steps Each step is presented as a single page with a few simple options to fill in or select Each of the five pages for each step of the Setup Wizard that follow contain the basic configuration settings that are most commonly required to select or change to set up the Viper SC IP router for specific functionality The steps are as follows Step 1 Station Name and Mode settings Station Name IP Forwarding Mode Relay Point Access Point and Multi Speed Mode Step 2 Network IP settings IP Address Network Mask and Default Gateway Step 3 Radio Setup Bandwidth Data and Control Packet Bit Rate Rx and Tx Frequency ranges and Tx Power Step 4 Encryption Enable or Disable and Encryption Pass Phrase Step 5 Setup completion and Viper reset Instructions for each of these steps are provided on the following pages Note some settin
199. le 1 1 4094 Clear T able 200 201 300 You can maintain a list of VLAN IDs used when processing packets where the packet VLAN ID VID is not equal to the interface VLAN ID PVID Example 1 LAN interface is operating in Tagged mode 2 LAN interface PVID 100 3 LAN interface contains the advanced configuration shown in the previous figure 4 The Viper receives a ingress packet with VID 400 gt The Viper silently drops the packet because the VID is not equal to the PVID and the VID is not in the Member table 5 The Viper receives a ingress packet with VID 200 The Viper keeps the packet unchanged because the VID is not equal to the PVID but the VID is in the Member table EXAMPLES The following examples show how packets are processed in Bridge mode with VLAN disabled in Bridge mode with VLAN enabled and in Router mode Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 174 BRIDGE MODE VLAN DISABLED Viper A Configuration Viper B Configuration Unit Status RF Status Basic Settings Unit Status RF Status Basic Settings Station Name ViperA Station Name ViperB Power Management Disable v Power Management Disable v Auto Reset Enabled Disabled Auto Reset Enabled Disabled Unit Reset Interval 1440 minutes minimum 10 minutes Unit Reset Interval 1440 minutes minimum 10 minutes Celsius lunpnralura Suns Celsius acc 2 Fahrenheit E Fa
200. le when it detects changes in the topology Locked A Locked neighbor entry is a Dynamic neighbor entry that has been saved into nonvolatile memory A Locked neighbor entry behaves like a Dynamic neighbor except it is saved into nonvolatile memory and will be restored into the table after a reboot The Control Operations section of the tab contains only buttons that allow you to modify the Neighbor Table Clear RSSIs Clears RSSI values from the table Clear List Clicking Clear List deletes neighbor units from the table Auto Scan or Force Scan will populate the table with neighbors discovered from the new discovery process but you must click Refresh Force Scan Clicking Force Scan starts the Neighbor Discovery process to update the table You must click the Refresh button to update the table displayed to see new entries Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 61 Test Connectivity Clicking Test Connectivity starts a Ping test to each neighbor in the table Reachable will be displayed in the Connectivity Status column of the table if the Ping is successful Click Refresh to update the table Add Static Entry Click this button to open a new window that allows you to enter static entries as shown in the following figure The RF MAC Address RF IP address Ethernet IP address RF netmask Ethernet netmask Hop count and the MAC address of the next hop and a description of it
201. ling master and one remote or a wide variety of other networking applications Figure 4 Point to Point Network Viper 2 ps Remote Device Polling Master 2 1 2 POINT TO MULTIPOINT NETWORK A Point to Multipoint network is a common network type used in SCADA and other polling systems The Master Polling station communicates with any number of remotes and controls the network by issuing polls and waiting for remote responses Individual PLC RTU remotes manage addressing and respond when their individual addresses are queried PLC RTU unit addresses are maintained in a scanning list stored in the host program or master terminal device at the SCADA host site Communications equipment is transparent and does not interact with specific remotes all data is coupled to the host on a single data line such a network is commonly used with synchronous radio modems and asynchronous radio modems Figure 5 Point to Multipoint Network Polling Master Remote 2 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 12 2 1 3 REPORT BY EXCEPTION CONFIGURATION In a true Report by Exception configuration the remotes send data to the master only when an event or exception has occurred in the remote However most Report by Exception systems have a master remote polling component The master polls the remotes once every hour or half hour to ensure there is still a valid communication path In a Report by Excepti
202. ll keeps on trying then the application could end up sending additional messages 2 3 and so on During this congestion or temporarily short network outage period the retried messages by the application could result in a backlog of outstanding messages and then on recovery resulting in a temporary sort of network storm that may take some time to recover or sometimes turns into a TCP connection failure or termination For this case it is better for the application to wait longer than trying to resend the message too quickly resulting in possible multiple responses or connection problems The application message timeout should not be made way too long since it may be used by the PLC application to terminate the connection A good value for TCP connections timeout that seems to work well is 20 seconds This gives 20 seconds time to make a new TCP connection On busy or temporarily congested multi hop system 25 or 30 seconds works better These settings are required for master PLC and remote PLCs For message timeout 10 seconds is often good but on busy or temporarily congested multi hop system 15 seconds works better These settings are required for master PLC and remote PLCs If the system is often overloaded then monitoring is required to determine the cause and the delays Traffic could be reduced or timeout needs to be increased OPENING A NEW CONNECTION WHILE PREVIOUS TCP CONNECTION IS STILL IN PROGRESS The PLC should not re open a
203. ll need to reset the unit for them te take effect LAN Port The LAN port interface can be enabled or disabled The default setting is enabled Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 73 LAN IP Address Allows each Viper to be set to a unique valid IP address The default IP address for the Viper LAN port is 192 168 205 1 LAN Netmask Together with the LAN IP Address the LAN netmask determines the subnet the Viper is on The netmask selected depends on the network topology The default LAN netmask is 255 255 255 0 LAN MAC Address The Media Access Control MAC address is a unique address that a manufacturer assigns to each networking device The MAC address is expressed as six hexadecimal numbers separated by colons in a format similar to AA BB CC DD EE FF for example LAN Gateway This is the IP Address of the Access Point to be used as the gateway to the management network If the Viper is the Access Point do not change the LAN Gateway from the default address The default address is 0 0 0 0 For each Viper network one and only one Access Point may be defined This is the Default Gateway for WAN access Remote Vipers use the RF IP address of the Viper that is set up to be the Access Point in the network as long as that Access Point is in the neighbor table Once it scans and finds an Access Point the Viper will then fill in the LAN Gateway automatically as that Access Point s RF IP address Ther
204. locally or remotely The Viper SC IP Router Web interface is divided into two sections In the left pane is the main navigation menu On the right is the content area for each page and displays the parameter settings available for the selected menu item Figure 25 CalAmp Viper SC IP Router Web Interface home page Radio Settings RF Network Settings LAN Settings sem Diagnostics Device Maintenance Unit Status RF Status Station Name Model Number LAN IP Address LAN MAC Address Uptime Modem Firmware Version Unit Status IP Forwarding Mode Station Mode DC Input Voltage Transceiver Temperature VPN Status 500 SC 140 5098 502 192 168 205 1 00 0A 99 80 32 86 0 00 02 22 DATARADIO Viper HW PCB 280 034 70 CodeBase ipr 3 6 R201307162030 Ok Router Remote 13 8 V 26 0 C Not ready vpn service disabled Refresh Acknowledge Unit Status The first time you log in to the Viper SC if no configuration changes have been made to the unit from the factory you will see a message instructing you to Change default settings Use the SetUp Wizard Note If the computer you are using has previously been used to set up a CalAmp router you may need to delete browser history specifically temporary internet files for some pages of the web interface to display correctly The navigation menu on the left allows you to navigate to configuration pages for the Viper SC Router Settings for the Vi
205. long Using a phrase length of at least 128 characters should provide an adequate security level for most networks A good pass phrase mixes alphabetic and numeric characters and avoids easy to guess simple names or prose Note The encryption pass phrase and key must be common to all units in a given network Save Click Save to save any changes you make in this tab See the Note that follows Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made in this tab Note If you enable or disable encryption or set a new encryption pass phrase a reset of the Viper is required before any new setting s will take effect as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 103 4 7 3 RADIUS RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service is the third from left tab of the Security page To navigate to this tab select Security from the main menu and click RADIUS This tab allows you to make settings for User Authentication and Client Configuration for RADIUS security Figure 63 Security RADIUS AES Encryption M Security Command Shell Local Radius amp Local Radius HTTP Server Local Radius amp Local Radius FTP Server Local Radius amp Local Radius Device Authentication Enabled Disabled Client Configuration 0000000000000 RADIUS Server IP 00 00 RADIUS Server Port 9612 1 655535 RADIUS Secret dataradio RADIU
206. managed object Figure 97 Dataradio REGS MIB tree 1 3 6 1 4 1 3732 B registrationModule 1 cellular 7 vis1network 2 Viewing MIB Files To view the hierarchy of SNMP variables in the form of a tree and view additional information about each node open each of the MIB files with an MIB browser In a MIB browser each object or node can be selected and its properties including OID can be viewed For simple networks any MIB browser supporting SNMP v2c can be used However for managing complex networks a more advanced SNMP Manager Browser is recommended Both Read Community and Read Write Community passwords are required to operate SNMP MIB for all Vipers The same password can be used for both read and read write This password is not the same password used to access the Viper Web Interface The following figure shows top level objects of the Viper scx mib file It includes eight branches b and three nodes or leaves I e ViperModule I e ViperStatus b e ViperDiagnostics b e ViperSetup b e ViperSetupAdv b e ViperStatistics b e ViperSecurity b e ViperNetworkManagement b Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 169 e ViperTraps b e ViperSaveConfig I e ViperResetUnit I The eight branches expand into additional branches and leaves The last two nodes are single leaves that perform specific functions following changes to the main branches
207. mewhat could congest the on air traffic depending on the system It is recommended to setup the ladder write message rungs not to start up simultaneously Write messages should be setup to open the TCP connection sequentially For more information it may be required to contact your PLC provider or Allen Bradley or Rockwell Automation support PLC Sends Too Many CIP Forward Open and CIP Forward Close Messages After the TCP connection is first established then the CIP Forward Open command is sent to open the CIP connection As long as there is always communication activity over that connection within eight times the Message Apply timeout of channel 1 there will be no more CIP Forward Close commands sent this results in fewer messages sent over the air which is good Often the Channel 1 Message Reply timeout is set to 3000 milliseconds This would generate additional CIP Forward Open and CIP Forward Close messages on air if the polling interval exceeds 3 sec x 8 24 seconds Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 185 Figure 99 Typical PLC Setup Channel Configuration Parameters Channel Configuration Driver Hardware Address DD DD BC 38 83 DA Network Link ID B IPAddreses 1952 1685 1 1 SubnetMask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 192 1768 1 10 Default Domain Name Prima Mame Sever g oF D User Provided Web Pages Starting Data File Number Number o
208. mine the presence of the remote or the master This should be disabled where possible If required change ping interval to every 5 or 10 minutes Check with PLC manufacturer for advice MESSAGING WITH TCP OPENING AND CLOSING TCP CONNECTION FOR EACH POLL Opening and closing TCP connection for each poll is not recommended Opening and closing a TCP connection requires 2 3 times more in and out messages then messages for a simple poll This increases the on air traffic and adds extra delays for the polling It is best to open all the TCP connections at the beginning when starting the poll and closing the TCP connection when poll is stopped Unsolicited messages done at non regular intervals and more than 4 minutes apart for the same remote should open and close the TCP connection for each message group Having a polling interval of more than 4 minutes for the same remote PLC or having a mixed more than 4 minutes and less than 4 minutes interval for unsolicited messages the TCP connection should be opened and closed each time With the Viper in proxy mode after 5 to 10 minutes of inactivity the Viper will remove the internal proxy context and resume the connection without proxy Therefore the benefit for proxy is lost When opening and closing is required than the additional traffic load for TCP open and closing needs to be planned into the system design SAFE LADDER LOGIC SUGGESTION When a PLC remotely controls important operations of
209. must be entered Use the check boxes at the bottom of the window to set the attribute whether the unit is an Access Point AP Relay Point RP using NAT NAT or using the TCP proxy TCP Note that the netmask format is a b c d Click Save to add the entry to the neighbor table click cancel to close the window without saving Figure 38 Add static neighbor entry window RF MAC Address RF IP Address RF netmask Ps Ethernet IP Ethernet fs Address netmask Hop Count Format xx2ocxx Next Hop RF MAC Address Format xx3ocxx Description Access Point Relay Point TCP Proxy NAT Attributes Save Cancel Delete Entry To delete an entry select it in the table and click this button Refresh Click Refresh to update the information displayed in the Local Status section 4 3 4 GLOBAL SETTINGS Global Settings is the fourth from left tab of the RF Network Settings page To navigate to this tab select RF Network Settings from the main menu and click Global Settings This tab allows you to make several Global Settings for the RF Network Note Settings in this tab are only available when the Viper is in Router mode The Global Settings tab allows you to make changes for a single Viper or to the entire Viper network It allows you to make changes to remote units Neighbor Tables Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 62 Figure 39 RF Network Settings Global Setti
210. n These two radio buttons allow you to import or delete a stored configuration file Both options use the same drop down list to select the configuration file To import a configuration file click the radio button for Import Configuration select the file from the drop down list and click Proceed Note Do not load more than five 5 separate configuration files onto a single Viper at a time Loading too many configuration files onto a Viper can use up excessive device memory and can cause the Viper to malfunction Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 124 To delete a configuration file click the radio button for Delete Configuration select the file from the drop down list and click Proceed Merge setting bundled in upgrade package with current configuration This option merges upgraded settings with the current configuration Select this radio button and click Proceed to load an upgrade package and merge the current configuration settings Then click Save Config and Reset Unit to reset the Viper to operate with the upgraded firmware and current configuration See notes below Notes The Firmware Upgrade process will replace an existing configuration with one that came bundled with the firmware upgrade package A reset of the Viper is required for to complete this process as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A Restore Factory Settings Use this selection to return the Viper to fact
211. n nnn 6272 where nnn nnn nnn nnn represent the Viper s IP address in dot decimal format The Viper s online diagnostic output will display on your screen The online diagnostic output is human and machine readable ASCII comma delimited format Any reader program used or written must decode the Version field and check for the type 1 for Computer Friendly or 2 for User Friendly to determine the format Note No overhead is generated in the Viper if no online diagnostic connection is actually made The output looks similar to the output shown in the following figure Figure 73 Diagnostic Output Sample Computer readable and Human Readable format TCP ASCI Terminal 192 168 205 100 58317 gt 192 168 205 1 6272 eS mE Rx Data Packet it s Local Address 192 168 205 100 192 168 285 1 08 88 88 01 2 11 5 Sec 8x81 192 168 205 1 192 168 206 1 39 13 38 U 68 88 dBm 68 88 dBm 1 18 VU 6 66 VU 0 000 Local Port 08 80 08 01 2 11 5 Sec 6x61 192 168 205 1 192 168 266 1 39 13 38 U 66 66 dBm 66 66 dBm 1 18 W 6 66 W 0 0007 58317 08 88 08 01 2 11 5 Sec 8x81 192 168 205 1 192 168 206 1 39 13 38 U 66 66 dBm 68 88 dBm 1 18 V 8 08 W 6 668 M uobis Adios 00 80 00 0901 2 11 5 Sec 8x81 192 168 205 1 192 168 206 1 39 13 30 U 60 00 dBm 68 88 dBm 1 18 W 0 00 W 0 000 F 192 168 2051 192 168 205 1 Remote Port 08 88 88 01 1 11 5 8x81 192 168 205 1
212. n retries then Msg Reply Timeout minimum 10000 msec Msg Reply Timeout maximum based on value determined by the above example With future releases of PLC software and firmware the described operation could change It is always recommended to be informed on PLC release changes from your PLC provider or manufacturer or Allen Bradley or Rockwell Automation support PLC Sends Many TCP IP Keep Alive Messages This has been seen on the MicroLogix 1100 and 1400 and on the SLC 5 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 186 The PLC sends many IP keep alive messages that are sent on air When several PLCs do the same it is possible that a good part of the on air bandwidth is used up by the keep alive traffic We recommend that the Viper be configured in router mode and that the TCP Proxy is enabled The Viper TCP Proxy feature will filter out the TCP IP keep alive messages It has been recommended to Allen Bradley and Rockwell Automation to have an option in the PLC settings to disable keep alive and have user selectable keep alive intervals This could potentially become available in future releases of PLC firmware PLC Reopens TCP IP Connection With the Same Source Port This has been seen on the MicroLogix 1100 and 1400 and on the SLC 5 When the PLC is restarted it uses the same TCP IP connection source port previously used Note The SLC 5 also uses the same source port for each new connection with
213. navigation menu or click the Home link at the upper right From this tab you can view Unit Identification and Status information for the Viper router Figure 26 Home Unit Status tab Home Unit Status RF Status Basic Settings Station Name Model Number LAN IP Address LAN MAC Address Uptime Modem Firmware Version Unit Status IP Forwarding Mode Station Mode DC Input Voltage Transceiver Temperature VPN Status Master1 140 5098 502 192 168 205 1 00 0A 99 80 32 86 0 00 02 52 DATARADIO Viper HW PCB 280 034 0 CodeBaseipr 3 6 R201307162030 Warning Radio reference clock failure Router Remote 13 8 V 270C Not ready vpn service disabled Refresh Acknowledge Unit Status Station Name User defined name given to the unit for ease of reference and used by various services The Station Name can be configured in the Basic Settings tab Model Number The model or product catalog number of the Viper router LAN IP Address The LAN IP Address assigned to the Viper LAN IP Address Network Mask and Gateway are configured in the LAN Settings tab Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 40 LAN MAC Address The MAC Address on the Ethernet port of the Viper Uptime The duration in days hours minutes and seconds DD HH MM SS that the unit has been powered up and operational since the last reset Modem Firmware Version The ve
214. navigation menu and click Wing Commander In this tab you can configure Security and other settings for the Wing Commander Protocol WCP While the Viper can be upgraded locally or over the air in a one to one fashion using the standard FTP protocol the CalAmp Wing Commander Protocol WCP allows a DeviceOutlook server to efficiently and reliably upgrade a field of Vipers OTA over the air in a one to many fashion using multicast UDP IP Viper uses the Wing Commander protocol for communication with DeviceOutlook which is CalAmp s Device Manager DeviceOutlook allows for upgrading Viper firmware from a remote server For a complete description of how to use these settings consult the WCP Client User Guide the DeviceOutlook User Guide and other related documents from the CalAmp support website http www calamp com su A typical upgrade scenario using DeviceOutlook is as follows The DeviceOutlook server splits the firmware upgrade archive into small numbered blocks which it then multicasts to the Vipers The DeviceOutlook server next polls the Viper units to assess which blocks need to be re sent The Viper stores the received blocks in non volatile memory as they are received maintaining the proper logical order even for blocks received out of order When DeviceOutlook establishes that the prescribed number of Vipers in the deployment have received all the blocks it directs the Vipers to install the image received and perform a station reset
215. new connection while the last one for the same remote PLC is still in progress When a TCP connection is attempted by the application the low level TCP driver will perform several retries to achieve the connection Often the original TCP connection SYN message is sent then two more are retried using exponential backoff timeouts This often results in 21 seconds 3 6 12 for all 3 tries If the PLC application or sometimes the TCP driver does not wait for the timeout to occur before starting a new connection then multiple connections to the same destination could be in progress If the PLC only accepts responses from the last connection attempted all previous delayed SYN ACK responses are ignored or terminated Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 181 Note Making a TCP connection or connection attempt is the initial process to open a TCP connection between two PLCs also called Endpoints Once the initial connection message exchanges are completed the connection is open and ready for data message exchange use The above re open connection scenario can easily occur at one of the following e Startup of PLC polling e Aremote not responding e When temporarily network outage occurs Having the PLC retrying new connections too quickly and on multiple remotes at the same time results in a sort of message storm resulting in more congestion The PLC application ladder logic and or TCP driver should set
216. ng and setting up Viper SC IP Routers There are three areas that need to be reviewed for each site to ensure that the Vipers will perform at a high level If these areas are properly inspected and any issues found corrected then the Vipers will perform extremely well It is important to record the commissioning information to make future troubleshooting simple even for individuals who have little RF or data protocol knowledge or expertise These procedures assume that a basic system Viper configuration router or bridge mode has been decided upon by the customer and is known to technical personnel commissioning the sites PHYSICAL INSTALLATION 1 Viper power supply a9 Oo o Ensure 60 watts for remote Vipers 10 30 VDC red and white are positive black is negative Ensure 90 watts for base station Vipers 10 30 VDC terminals are marked for positive and for negative Ensure a good connection White must be tied shorted to positive voltage if not using low power feature Watch the Viper s LEDs to determine if the Viper is resetting when transmitting This may be a sign of inadequate power supply capacity or poor power regulation 2 Physical mounting d b Remote Vipers i Remote Vipers should be mounted in a weather tight housing No ventilation is required Radio operating temperature range is 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F When possible a temperature controlled environment is recommended
217. ng devices to host computers allowing a large number of devices to share a limited number of ports TCP Transmission Control Protocol A network protocol for transmitting data that requires acknowledgement from the recipient of data sent TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A set of protocols for network communication Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 137 Telnet User command and TCP IP protocol used for accessing remote PCs Terminal Server Acts as a converter between Ethernet IP and RS 232 Protocol TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol UDP IP based file transfer protocol Topology The physical layout of a network Transparent Device capable of transmitting all data without regard to special characters etc UDP User Datagram Protocol Network protocol for transmitting data that does not require acknowledgement from the recipient of the sent data Upgrade To replace existing software or firmware with a newer version URL Universal Resource Locator The address of a file located on the Internet VDC Voltage Direct Current VLAN Virtual Local Area Network VPN Virtual Private Network A computer network that uses a public network example the Internet to transmit private data VPN users can exchange data as if inside an internal network even if they are not directly interconnected VTS Virtual Terminal Server Viper SC IP Router for
218. ngs RF Network RF Settings Network Management Table RF Bandwidth Neighbor Global Settings RF MAC Address Configuration After Remote Operation Delete Station Replace Station New RF MAC Address Save Configuration After Remote Operation Manual Scan Sawe x Configuration Auto Scan After Remote Disabled Operation Q Change HD mode Enabled Save C M Configuration o After Remote Operation Change TCP Proxy Mode Save Clear Neighbor Configuration Table After Remote Operation Reset Stat ion s Q 5ave Configuration Get Status Single Station Note All selections in this tab apply to all Vipers in the network unless you check the Single Station check box near the bottom of the tab and enter the RF MAC Address of the Viper to which the change will be applied Delete Station Enter the RF MAC Address of the station to be deleted from the Neighbor Table of all Vipers on the network To save this change to the configuration after remote operation place a check in the check box at the right Replace Station Enter the RF MAC Address of the unit that will be removed and the RF MAC Address of the Viper that will replace it To save this change to the configuration after remote operation place a check in the check box at the right Change ND mode This setting allows you to change the Neighbor Discovery ND mode for all Vipers in the network When th
219. nnector Contact number Color Description Pin Out Left to Right EE Fan Power Output 5V 2 Red Positive 10 30 VDC 1 White Enable to Power Management See Note e Power Viper is awake e No Power Viper is asleep Note The white Enable line must be tied to the red positive lead of the connector for the Viper to power up and function A WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Do not disconnect unless power has been removed or the area is known to be non hazardous 1 3 3 4 ANTENNA CONNECTOR Standard Viper SC models have a 50 ohm TNC female antenna connector This connection functions for both transmit and receive ANT Warning See Selecting Antenna and Lightning Arrestor combinations for information about types of lightning arrestors to not use and good design practices to use when selecting a lightning arrestor for use with an antenna Dual port models feature a 50 ohm TNC female antenna connector functioning for transmit only and a 50 ohm SMA female antenna connector functioning for receive only The separate receive antenna connector is ideal for applications that require additional receive filtering external PA s and other options Warning The transmit antenna port must not be connected directly to the receive antenna port of the Dual Port Viper SC Excessive power into the receive antenna port will damage the radio Input power to the receiver should not exceed 17 dBm 50 mW To reduce potential int
220. nostic interval is the time interval in seconds at which the Viper will broadcast the diagnostic string Setting the online diagnostic interval to zero 0 disables online diagnostic reporting The default setting is three 3 seconds Version 3 Device Manager 1 Computer Friendly You can change the version of online diagnostic messages which affects the format Three usen cea versions are available 3 Device Manager 1 Computer Friendly This is the old style It is computer readable but can be difficult to readily understand 2 UserFriendly This is the same as Computer Friendly 1 with the exception that all values are human readable with the trade off that this format is slightly more verbose An example and explanation are provided in the following section 3 Device Manager This is the newest version available at time of writing this user manual It is used with CalAmp s external Device Manager tool DeviceOutlook It is not compatible with previous versions 1 amp 2 so when it is in use it must be enabled on all Vipers that are part of the network This is the default setting to allow device management through DeviceOutlook Local Copy Only When this is enabled the Viper will not piggyback its diagnostic messages over user traffic The Viper will still output its diagnostic messages over to TCP clients connected to the online diagnostic TCP port Information in the lower section of the ta
221. ntrol Connection Control Status DOWN Advanced Settings Enable Disable 19200 O7 Gs 01 O2 Oodd Even 9 None Meverassened MARK character time O Show 9Hide Cancel Refresh If you Save changes te any parameters marked i you wil need to reset the unit fer them te take effect COM Port or Setup Port Each port may be enabled or disabled The default setting is Enabled Speed Select a 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 56700 or 115200 baud rate for the COM Port Note The Setup Port is limited to 19200 This should be configured to match the settings of the connected device e COM Port The default baud rate for the COM Port is 9600 e Setup Port The default baud rate for the Setup Port is 19200 Data Bits Number of bits making up each word of data This is set according to the Host configuration and should be configured to match the settings of the connected device The default setting is 8 Stop Bits Marks the end of the serial port data byte This should be configured to match the settings of the connected device The default setting is 1 Parity Added to identify the sum of bits as odd or even This should be configured to match the settings of the connected device The default setting is None DCD Control The DCD Data Carrier Detect line can be set for one of the following Always Asserted Never Asserted or Envelope Mode the DCD will be asserte
222. o communicate with other stations Online Diagnostics can be sent anywhere including being backhauled Backhaul adds to network traffic flow and must be taken into account when designing a network If a return flow is necessary it needs to be reduced substantially to have a minimal effect on the network The Viper can support up to four 4 diagnostic socket connections at once This may be used for example to carry out monitoring at a main office and at up to three separate field locations It is also possible for one of the four connections to use a serial port instead of enabling it in the Viper Web browser interface Figure 72 Diagnostics Online Diagnostics Diagnostics On line Diagnostics Interval seconds ucros diis 3 Device Manager Local Copy Only Enabled 9 Disabled Version 3 Configuration 0 Identification 2 P Address ORF MAC Address Measurements V Period Temperature Celsius v Temperature Fahrenheit A v Supply Voltage v RSSI A v Forward Power A v Reverse Power A v RX Packet Error Rate amp v TX Packet Error Rate i v Alarms A v QoS v TX Pkts Total success v TX Pkts Total failure A v RX Pkts Total A v SNR Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked i you wil need to reset the unit for them to take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 120 On line Diagnostic Interval The online diag
223. of the interfaces Ethernet or RF e Remote IP Address and Remote Port Number These two parameters are used to identify the remote endpoint TCP Server UDP Mode In this mode of operation all UDP packets addressed to the Local IP Address and the Local Port Number are sent over the serial interface Any data received from the serial interface is sent over the serial interface e Local Port Number The local port number parameters are used in reception to indicate which UDP packets are to be sent to the serial port The local port number parameters are used in transmission to set the source IP address of the IP header and the source port number of the UDP packet e Remote IP Address and Remote Port Number The remote port number and remote IP address parameters are used in transmission to set the destination IP address of the IP header and the destination port number of the UDP packet TCP Client Server Mode In this mode of operation the Viper acts as both a TCP server and a TCP client Data received from any remote endpoint is sent over the serial port Data received from the serial port is sent to every remote endpoint connected to the TCP client server e Local Port Number This parameter is used to define the TCP server e Remote IP Address and Remote Port Number These parameters are used to define the TCP client The Viper will try to establish a TCP connection to the remote endpoint defined by these two parameters when there i
224. on configuration there will not be a master controlling RF traffic and RF collisions will often occur Viper has several collision avoidance features to help minimize collisions Viper is a polite radio This means Viper will check the RF traffic on the receive channel before transmitting If there is no RF traffic present no carrier present it will transmit If there is RF traffic carrier present the Viper SC will buffer the data Viper will transmit the buffered data when there is no RF traffic present 2 1 4 EXTENDING THE COVERAGE AREA WITH A RELAY POINT A Viper can be configured as a Relay Point see the following figure Relay Points provide store and forward repeating of necessary information from one coverage area to the next In Bridge mode all traffic is forwarded In Router mode only Broadcast Packets and address specific packets are forwarded There may be multiple Relay Points to extend coverage over several hops Note Multiple relay points in a single network may slow the flow of data traffic Serial data is always sent out as a broadcast message A broadcast message cannot take advantage of IP routing mode so it must use relay points to move from one RF coverage area to another However it may be possible to configure the Viper SC so that it may be able to take advantage of the router mode feature and collision avoidance features of the router mode An option to configure the Viper SC as a relay point is in the first
225. on the RF interface good and bad packets to the remote unit unicast or broadcast e A packet is bad failed if notification was not received from the remote unit of the arrival of the packet e The transmit Packet Error Rate PER is calculated using the same formula as explained earlier repeated below for convenience PER bad bad good x 100 e When the Packet Error Rate is indicated by a question mark it is because the unit cannot determine the value This is because the RF ACK feature is not enabled on this unit or no IP packet has been transmitted yet The RF ACK feature lets the unit know that the packet has made it to the remote unit RSSI The most recent Received Signal Strength Indicator RSSI from the remote unit Each time a new packet is received from the remote unit the RSSI in this table is calculated and updated SNR The most recent Signal to Noise Ration SNR from the remote unit Each time a new packet is received from the remote unit the SNR in this table is calculated and updated Refresh Click Refresh to update the statistics to show the most current information available Clear Zero Interface Stats Clicking Clear Zero Interface Stats or cycling power to the Viper will reset all statistics to zero 4 8 3 SNMP Note The SNMP feature and this tab SNMP is only available when the appropriate feature key is installed in the Viper Contact CalAmp for information abo
226. onnect to a network Connect or reconnect to a wireless wired dial up or VPN net ug gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network Connections File Edit View Tools Advanced Help Organize v Local Area Connection ew magstadtrouter d Intel R 82562V 2 10 100 Network Click Properties Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 31 7 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and click the Properties button amp Intel R 82562V 2 10 100 Network Connection This connection uses the following tems o Client for Microsoft Networks M QoS Packet Scheduler Click Internet Protocol M1 di Fie and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks 4 Intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 Version 4 TCP IPv4 Do mL 8 Select Use the following IP Address and enter a IP Address 192 168 205 100 b Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 c Default Gateway Leave empty 9 Click OK to apply and save these settings You may need to reboot your computer to complete the process 3 5 LOG IN V Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver s Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Properties C9 Caen t 3 i RI zZ Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Gel LI
227. onnecti 35 2 Error Code Extended Erra Error Path Error T ext O Enable O Enable Waiting When Communication Is Between ControlLogix or CompactLogix and other Logix Series PLCs These PLCs Controllers usually use Ethernet IP CIP unconnected protocol to communicate with each other Note see the following figure that when the Message Type is SLC Typed Read or SLC Typed Write the Logix MSG instruction always uses an Unconnected CIP notice that the Connected checkbox is grayed out For example this is used when using PCCC encapsulated in Ethernet IP command Others than read or write for SLC Figure 104 Message Configuration Communication showing CIP selected and Connected Checkbox Unavailable Message Configuration M5G1 Configuration Communication Tag Message Type SLC Typed Read Source Element No 1 Integer Tag Number OF Elements Destination Element Message Configuration M5G1 Configuration Communication Tag e Fath EIE EP ESTERI LacalEMB 2 132 158 1 3 1 0 Broadcast 2 Enable O Enable Waiting Communication Method 2 Error Code Extended B cIP DH Channel A D estir Error Path CIF with z T Source Link IU Uestr Error Text Source ID Talat o d bee Connected Cache Connections Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 192 Summary of Connected or Unconn
228. or SC into a pre SC Viper Upgrade Viper SC and Viper SC Modem Firmware SC Modem firmware version has a Viper 3 X release number See the figure above This should not be confused with the radio firmware code To upgrade the firmware in the modem refer to the Support Bulletin or our website at http www calamp com support Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 134 Upgrade Viper Non SC Modem Firmware Non SC modem firmware has a Viper 1 XX release number This should not be confused with the radio firmware code To upgrade the firmware in the modem refer to the Support Bulletin on our website at http www calamp com support Upgrade Modem Firmware in Older Non SC Radios To upgrade the modem firmware in older non SC radios refer to the Support Bulletin on our website htto www calamp com support 7 2 2 UPGRADE THE RADIO FIRMWARE To upgrade the firmware in the modem refer to the Support Bulletin on our website at htto www calamp com support Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 135 APPENDIX A ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Access Point Communication hub for users to connect to a LAN Access Points are important for providing heightened wireless security and for extending the physical range of wireless service accessibility AES Advanced Encryption Standard Airlink Physical radio frequency connection used for communication between
229. or replaced Products shall be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period Buyer shall pay all shipping charges handling charges fees and duties for returning defective Products to CalAmp or authorized service agent CalAmp will pay the return shipping charges if the Product is repaired or replaced under warranty exclusive of fees and duties Repair or replacement of defective Products as set forth in this paragraph fulfills any and all warranty obligations on the part of CalAmp This warranty is void and CalAmp shall not be obligated to replace or repair any Products if i the Product has been used in other than its normal and customary manner ii the Product has been subject to misuse accident neglect or damage or has been used other than with CalAmp approved accessories and equipment iii unauthorized alteration or repairs have been made or unapproved parts have been used in or with the Product or iv Buyer failed to notify CalAmp or authorized service agent of the defect during the applicable warranty period CalAmp is the final arbiter of such claims THE AFORESAID WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED AND IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE CALAMP AND BUYER AGREE THAT BUYER S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY OF SAID WARRANTIES IT AS SET FORTH ABOVE BUYER AGREES THAT IN NO EVENT SHALL CALAMP BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL CON
230. ory default settings See notes below Important Activating Restore Factory Settings will reset the IP address of the unit to its default value of 192 168 205 1 and reset the User name and Password to defaults of Admin and ADMINISTRATOR Have a record of all original Viper factory settings available before proceeding with restoring to factory settings Proceed Click Proceed to apply the settings in this tab Cancel Click Cancel to cancel configuration changes made in this tab Note If you imported or deleted a configuration file in the Viper or restored factory settings a reset of the Viper is required for any of these to take effect as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A Note It is also possible to access the Viper s CLI Command Line Interface to restore the factory default values A terminal emulator program set to 19 2 kbps N 8 1 can access the CLI via serial cable to the Setup port then entering the following CLI commands Login Admin Password current password or default password ADMINISTRATOR default Enter this will log you out but log back in as before save Enter stationreset Enter The above will reset the Viper and when the Viper is back online it will have the factory default values including the default Ethernet IP address 192 168 205 1 This will not reset the security parameters including the password Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 125 4 9
231. osing Old TCP COMMCCU OR esos ccetctece canned cca Dota nc atia acatsdensaniaadasate aed aneaas eoptodeesearautvacan eadeni metu EM REL cc ears 182 sending Fragmented Messages c atii o i t se tcd cat tee v us UM ot ac medius ue axe eut 182 Heartbeat Messac eS PL 182 Avoid Unnecessary Traffic Over The Air N twork c ccssscccccssseccccseseccecaeseccecaessecessauaescessaeneceessanseceesuaaseeessaaeeeeeees 183 Monitoring Remote PLCs with Monitoring Application Tools cccsssccccssseccesececceececseneccssuseccseseesseuseessueseesaases 183 Remote ALIVE CIO G cu 183 Messaging with TCP Opening and Closing TCP Connection for Each Poll ccccccsssseecccceeseeeeeceeseeeseseeeceesseeseeeens 183 Safe Ladder COSICes SUB ESTON Su oct Meet rea re ee a ee a ee ee 183 PLC Ladder Logic On Restart Opens All Connections At Once Instead Of Sequentially seeeeesssssee 184 Viper General Setup With PLCS sei iis seco qe So reda S Rar eed EE roin mur Ius SR ped E deat ped omen odi pace equa a pedi eut que OR pe pa E ur qued Spe 184 Set Up Viper In Router Mode Instead of Bridge Mode cccccccssssseccccaesseccccneecccesauueecesseeseccessueaecesseaaeeeessauaeseessuaasses 184 Filtering TCP Keep Alive With Viper TCP Proxy Mode cccccsssccccssscccensecccauscccaeecccsaueceseueecessaecessauseeseueeeessa
232. ource Address 172 3 source Address 172 31 5 2 Destination Address 1982 1 Destination Address 172 31 5 1 Private Network 192 168 205 0 Public Network 172 31 5 0 In the above example Host 1 sends a packet to Host 2 The Host 2 device does not see the private IP address of Host 1 When Host 2 sends a reply to Host 1 Host 2 uses the destination IP address 172 31 5 1 which is translated back to the appropriate destination IP address by the NAT enabled device as shown in the preceding figure NAT does a lot more than just translation of the source IP address For the UDP and TCP protocol NAT will also translate the source port numbers Special handling is also done for more specific protocols like FTP port 21 and Modbus port 502 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 159 NAT ON VIPER The purpose of the NAT Network Address Translation protocol is to hide a private IP network from a public network This mechanism serves first as a firewall and second to save IP address space In a Viper it is normally used on the WAN side of an IP network to hide local IP addresses from an external IP network The NAT enabled device translates the source address of packets transiting from the private network to the public network The original IP source address gets replaced by the NAT enabled IP address address of the outgoing interface The NAT module creates an address creates an address translation table that is u
233. out PLC restart Earlier Viper firmware when in Router mode and having TCP Proxy enabled did not allow the new TCP connection to go through immediately if the same TCP source port was used and if the PLC did not terminate the old connection After the old TCP Proxy connection timeout the new connections are okay Starting with Viper firmware v1 10 and Viper SC firmware v3 2 and continuing forward with Viper SC a new enhancement was added to allow new connection created when using the same source port It has been recommended to Allen Bradley and Rockwell Automation to have the TCP source port randomized when the unit is restarted This could potentially become available in future releases of PLC firmware PLC Detecting Communication Failure While Viper TCP IP Filters Keep Alives The PLC should not reopen a new connection while the connection for the same remote PLLC is still in progress This has been seen on MicroLogix 1100 and 1400 When the MicroLogix PLC sends messages but does not receive response messages it will still keep the TCP connection open forever as long as the Viper ACKs the keep alives Even if the PLC application reports communication loss at the PLC application level the PLC will not open a new connection This is often a result after having communication issues with remotes New firmware is available from Allen Bradley for the MicroLogix 1100 and 1400 Allen Bradley MicroLogix firmware overview at the time of writing t
234. outer Information Protocol version 2 is a dynamic IP routing protocol based on the distance vector algorithm RIPv2 is used only in Router mode The default setting is Disabled Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 85 Save Click Save to save the change if you change RIPv2 from Enabled to Disabled or from Disabled to Enabled See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any change you may have made to enable or disable RIPv2 Note If you change the RIPv2 Enabled or Disabled setting in this tab a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect as indicated by the yellow alert symbol AN The Routing Table area displays a table of IP routes that are active in the Viper In general the Viper s routing table is populated by the entries in the Neighbor Table However there are some instances in which routes may be required to be entered manually but in most cases the Neighbor Table entries will be enough 4 A row number that the Viper uses internally to organize routing entries in the Routing Table Destination Network IP Address Displays the IP Address of the Destination Network Netmask Together with the IP Address the Netmask determines the subnet of the Destination Network Gateway IP Address Displays the IP Address of the Gateway RF MAC If the route to the Gateway is pointing to another Viper the RF MAC address is displayed in this column
235. ove the carrier sense level If the Noise Detected Count is high it may be an indication that the Carrier Sense Threshold should be raised Rx Total Other Count Total number of messages the Viper overheard that were intended for another station These messages are discarded Refresh Click Refresh to update the statistics to show the most current information available Clear Zero Interface Stats Clicking Clear Zero Interface Stats or cycling power to the Viper will reset all statistics to zero 4 8 2 REMOTE STATISTICS Remote Statistics is the second from left tab of the Diagnostics page To navigate to this tab select Diagnostics from the main menu and click Remote Statistics This tab provides information in table form about communication with remote units including statistics for packets transmitted and received to and from them received signal strength and signal to noise ratio Figure 69 Diagnostics Remote Statistics Di TM Interface Remote SNMP Online Radio ones Statistics Statistics gt Diagnostics Log 4477 2 0495 80 00 02 10 128 0 2 24 aise fei 50 51 38 69 broadcast 80 00 05 10 128 0 5 24 ae Prud c a broadcast unicast 80 00 03 10 128 0 3 24 7 broadcast unicast 80 00 04 10 128 0 4 24 broadcast a 50 42 38 25 100 00 z N A N A 100 0095 N A N A LS cA cAJ ee E cA XJ Refresh Clear Zera Stats This Unit Centered at the top of the
236. pectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 101 4 7 SECURITY The Security page contains four tabs Password AES Encryption RADIUS and VPN 4 7 1 PASSWORD Password is the first left most tab of the Security page To navigate to this tab select Security from the main menu This tab allows you to set User Names and assign and change passwords for users of the Viper to log in to the Viper Web interface Figure 61 Security Password AES Radius W Encryption Secu rity Password User Name Cancel Old Password New Password New Password Confirm Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked i you wil need to reset the unit for them to take effect User Name This field allows you to add new user names for security on the Viper For initial installation all Vipers are shipped with the default User Name of Admin If you want the Viper to check the password only at log in and not require a valid user name to be entered click to place a check in the box labeled Any Note If you are using a RADIUS server the User Name will always be required Old Password For initial installation the default password for the Admin user name is ADMINISTRATOR all uppercase letters For subsequent access use the current password New Password Enter a string of any letters or numbers of at least 8 characters and not exceeding 15 characters in length CAUTON Do not lose the new password or you will not be able to ga
237. pectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 178 Eth A RF Eth B 5 6 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 179 APPENDIX VIPER PLC SETUP PLC AND LADDER LOGIC SETUP The general information in this section is designed to assist PLC and system setup and for ladder logic program setup The focus is on TCP communication UDP is often friendlier to on air networks since it requires less handshaking or overhead but often TCP is the only choice available on PLCs PLC communication via serial lines or serial terminal server is not covered here nevertheless the general information provided here may apply POLLING REMOTE PLCS WITHOUT UNSOLICITED MESSAGES When polling multiple PLCs from a master PLC over the RF network the polling method used has an important influence To minimize on air congestion and collision it is best to sequentially time the polling to each remote and have remotes generating none or few unsolicited inbound messages and also making few remote to remote PLC messages or none The master should be set up as follows e Sequentially poll next remote PLC when detecting the ladder logic done bit or equivalent message complete operation or on the later logic error bit or equivalent could be timeout or other e Wait for example 200 milliseconds before polling the next remotes This allows TCP handshaking to complete For some systems it may be more or less and ther
238. per 4 Ethernet IP 10 200 1 49 RF IP 10 0 0 4 Solarwinds Advanced Subnet Calculator available as a free download from the Solarwinds website at www solarwinds com can be used to help calculate subnets as used in this example The Advanced Subnet Calculator will calculate and display the range of host IP addresses that can be used as shown in the following figure Figure 11 Router Mode Example 2 Subnet Calculations File Edit Tools Help Address Details Classful Subnet Calculator CIDR Calculator Subnet Addresses Address Block 10 200 1 1 f16 CIDA Mask 255 255 01 0 or 16 bits Copy Details Generate Subnets Mask Bits 28 Humber of Subnets 4096 Host Bits 4 Hosts per Subnet 14 Subnet Bit Mask Innnnnnnn nnnnnnnn ssssssss sssshhhh Subnet Mask Subnet Size Host Range 10 200 1 0 255 255 255 240 14 10 200 1 1 to 10 200 1 14 10 200 1 16 255 255 255 240 14 10 200 1 17 to 10 200 1 30 10 200 1 32 255 255 255 240 14 10 200 1 33 to 10 200 1 46 10 200 1 48 255 255 255 240 14 10 200 1 49 to 10 200 1 62 10 200 1 64 255 255 255 240 14 10 200 1 65 to 10 200 1 78 10 200 1 80 255 255 255 240 14 10 200 1 81 to 10 200 1 94 10 200 1 96 255255 255 240 14 10 200 1 97 to 10 200 1 110 de Broadcast 10 200 1 15 10 200 1 31 10 200 1 47 10 200 1 63 10 200 1 79 10 200 1 95 10 200 1 111 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 240 10 200 1 112 255 255 255 240 14 10 200 1 128 250 255 255 240 14 10 200 1 144 255 25
239. per SC are arranged by pages Pages typically contain several tabs each of which containing status information or configuration settings which are distributed along the horizontal bar that contains the page label The Home page for example shown in the previous figure has three tabs Unit Status RF Status and Basic Settings You can navigate to each tab by clicking the tab label The current tab Unit Status in this example is indicated by the tab label highlighted in blue Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 39 To access online Help for content of a specific tab in the Viper Web Interface click the Help link near the top of the page while in the tab Toreturn to the Home page Unit Status tab from any tab in the Viper Web Interface click the Home link The Viper router can be reset if necessary by clicking the Reset link You will be asked to confirm that you want to reset the router and the Viper Web Interface will be unavailable until after the Viper powers up Any time you change a parameter in a tab you must confirm the change by clicking the applicable button at the bottom of the web page tab 4 1 HOME The Home page of the Viper Web Interface contains three tabs Unit Status RF Status and Basic Settings 4 1 1 UNIT STATUS The Unit Status tab is the first tab displayed when navigating to the Viper Web interface To return to this tab select Home from the main
240. per SC detects high background noise ACT Blinking Green Ethernet activity detected on PHY link RJ45 LAN No Ethernet activity on PHY link RJ45 LAN Ethernet connection Established 100 Mbps RJ45 LAN Ethernet connection Established 10 Mbps RJ45 LAN No Ethernet connection RJ45 LAN 1 3 3 FRONT PANEL The front panel shown in the following figure has connections described in the following table Figure 3 Front Panel Dual Port Viper SC 200 Shown 2 Oye a STATS Ts Table 2 Front Panel Connections Item Description Quantity 1 50 Ohm TNC Female Antenna connector 50 Ohm SMA Female Receive Antenna connector Dual Port models only Right angle Power Connector 10 30 V DC DE 9F RS 232 ports one 1 labeled Setup one 1 labeled COM 10 Base T Auto MDIX RJ 45 Ethernet LAN connection VHF UHF models or 10 100 Base T Tx Auto MDIX RJ 45 Ethernet LAN connection 220 900 MHz models Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 3 1 3 3 1 ETHERNET LAN PORT The Ethernet LAN port is an RJ 45 receptacle with a 10 Base T or 100 Base T Tx for 220 MHz and 290 MHz models Ethernet connection and Auto MDIX Refer to the following table for pin out descriptions and Section 4 4 6 to configure the LAN settings for this port Table 3 Pin out for IEEE 802 3 RJ 45 Receptacle Contacts Contact 10BaseT Signal The name shows the default function Given the
241. polling device resends the query too fast it may collide on the RF with the previous response causing the new query and the old response to be lost In this poll response scenario the user may not be able to configure the wait period between the request and the response in the polling device The Tx pacing parameter allows the user to configure a waiting period to insert in the Viper unit after each packet is sent out over the RF interface This waiting period gives enough time for the response to come back to the polling device without causing any collisions on the RF interface These parameters set the amount of time for the Viper unit to remain idle after sending a packet over the RF interface If it is set to 100 ms it will send a packet wait 100 ms send the next packet wait 100 ms etc Normally the pacing is set to 0 meaning don t wait send the next packet right away TCP The TCP packet pacing in milliseconds Default setting is zero 0 UDP The UDP packet pacing in milliseconds Default setting is zero 0 Fragment Fragment packet pacing in milliseconds Default setting is zero 0 Other Pacing in milliseconds for any other type of packet Default setting is zero 0 Save Click Save to save any changes you have made to settings in this tab See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note If you change the Data Retries or TCP Proxy
242. pour la sant On ne devrait pas tre en face de l antenne lorsque l metteur est en marche Les consignes de s curit recommand es pour l exposition humaine l nergie lectromagn tiques de radiofr quences sont contenues dans le Code 6 canadien de la s curit disponible aupr s de Sant Canada la Commission Communications F d ral FCC Bulletin 65 et la recommandation du 12 Juillet 1999 sur la limitation de l exposition du public aux champs lectromagn tiques de O Hz 300 GHz 1999 519 CE du Conseil de l Union europ enne Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 26 2 7 TERRAIN AND SIGNAL STRENGTH A line of sight path between stations is highly desirable and provides the most reliable communications link in all cases A line of sight path can often be achieved by mounting each station antenna on a tower or other elevated structure that raises it high enough to clear surrounding terrain and other obstructions The requirement for a clear transmission path depends on the distance to be covered by the system If the system is to cover a limited distance then some obstructions in the transmission path may be tolerable For longer range systems any obstruction could compromise the performance of the system or block transmission entirely The signal strength RSSI at the receiver must exceed the receiver sensitivity by an amount known as the fade margin to provide reliable operation under
243. que est une antenne de type fouet Exposition aux 1 2 longueur d onde install e sur un poteau ou pyl ne Radiofr quences Distance de s curit minimum Gain de Antenne mimoecmOmo f sasi 10dBi 15dBi 132 MHz VHF 215 MHz UHF Note est de la responsabilit de l utilisateur de garantir le respect des r glements MPE de la FCC lorsque vous utilisez cet appareil d une fa on autre que celle d crite ci dessus L installateur doit s assurer que l antenne est situ e ou orient e de fa on ne pas mettre un champ RF d passant les limites de radiations pour la population g n rale tablies par Sant Canada La radio Viper SC est destin e a tre utilis dans les march s contr les industriels et e La radio Viper SC utilise un metteur radiofr quence faible puissance L nergie concentr e d une antenne peut poser un risque pour la sant On ne devrait pas tre en face de l antenne lorsque l metteur est en marche Les consignes de s curit recommand es pour l exposition humaine l nergie lectromagn tiques de radiofr quences sont contenues dans le Code 6 canadien de la s curit disponible aupr s de Sant Canada la Commission Communications F d ral FCC Bulletin 65 et la recommandation du 12 Juillet 1999 sur la limitation de l exposition du public aux champs lectromagn tiques de O Hz 300 GHz 1999 519 CE du Conseil de l Union europ enne Class A Digital Device Compliance
244. r or even a master Viper connected through a switch the Viper proxy context is lost The Viper will reestablish proxy automatically ALLEN BRADLEY PLC FOR VIPER SYSTEM This guide is intended to assist with Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1400 and 1100 communication setup between master PLC and remote PLC using an Allen Bradley TCP protocol between PLCs Some information may apply for the Allen Bradley SLC 5 PLC Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 184 PLC communication via serial lines or serial terminal server is not covered here Nevertheless some of the information could apply Note Please consult information about general PLC setup presented earlier in this appendix for background information about systems with PLC setup ALLEN BRADLEY MICROLOGIX 1100 OR 1400 MAY ALSO APPLY TO SLC 5 Following are important settings recommended to improve communication when used with a limited bandwidth Viper network This provides more specific information that supplements the general PLC communication information presented earlier in this appendix Note When required contact your PLC provider or Allen Bradley or Rockwell Automation support PLC Ladder Logic On Restart Opens All Connections At Once Instead Of Sequentially When the PLC ladder program is set up to have at startup all write message rungs set to true all TCP connections are triggered simultaneously This creates an overload of TCP SYNs and so
245. r SC basic unit Description Viper SC IP Router 60 in Cat 5 Ethernet Cable Power Cable Start Up CD ROM and Product Documentation Card Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 9 1 5 2 TWO AND THREE PIECE KIT ADDITIONAL ITEMS The following items are included with two and three piece Viper SC Developer Kits Description SMA Male to BNC Female Connector SMA Female to BNC Male Connector TNC Male to BNC Female Connector Mini Circuits 5 W 20 dB Attenuator Flex Rubber Duck Antenna VHF UHF or 900 MHz 120 VAC to 13 8 VDC 4 A Power Supply Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 10 2 NETWORK ARCHITECTURE AND SYSTEM PLANNING This section discusses network architecture basic network types interfacing modems and DTE data protocols for efficient channel operation as well as providing tips for selecting an appropriate site antenna selection and reducing the chance of harmful interference 2 1 NETWORK ARCHITECTURE In a radio system only one radio should transmit at a time If two radios transmit at the same time to another radio RF collisions occur Collisions will slow data traffic and may corrupt data Most SCADA networks have a device that is configured to be the polling master It is the responsibility of this polling master to control RF traffic so RF collisions do not occur Viper has RF collision avoidance
246. r product catalog number and the organization determining compliance for the country or geographical area in which the Viper is to be operated e 140 5018 502 VHF 136 000 174 000 MHz 6 25 50 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W e 140 5018 503 VHF 136 000 174 000 MHz 6 25 50 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W Dual RF Ports e 140 5028 504 VHF 215 000 240 000 MHz 6 25 100 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W e 140 5028 505 VHF 215 000 240 000 MHz 6 25 100 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W Dual RF Ports e 140 5048 302 UHF Range 3 406 1125 470 000 MHz 6 25 50 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W e 140 5048 303 UHF Range 3 406 1125 470 000 MHz 6 25 50 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W Dual RF Ports e 140 5048 502 UHF Range 5 450 000 511 975 MHz 6 25 50 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W e 140 5048 503 UHF Range 5 450 000 511 975 MHz 6 25 50 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W Dual RF Ports e 140 5098 304 PCS 880 000 902 000 MHz 12 5 100 kHz bandwidth 1 8 W e 140 5098 305 PCS 880 000 902 000 MHz 12 5 100 kHz bandwidth 1 8 W Dual RF Ports Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 45 e 140 5098 504 ISM 928 000 960 000 MHz 12 5 100 kHz bandwidth 1 8 W e 140 5098 505 ISM 928 000 960 000 MHz 12 5 100 kHz bandwidth 1 8 W Dual RF Ports European Australian and New Zealand Compliant Models ETSI AS NZ e 140 5018 600 VHF 142 000 174 000 MHz 6 25 50 kHz bandwidth 1 10 W e 140 5048 601 VHF 142 000 174 000 MHz 6 25 50 kHz bandwidth
247. r to accept the IP address assigned by the Viper SC Before powering on the unit confirm that your computer s Ethernet port is set up to receive an IP address from an external DHCP server confirm it is not set to a static address The process required to do this differs depending on the version of Windows or other operating system you are using For Microsoft Windows XP do the following Pie Ede wew Fovorntes Tods Hep Q d Paua ri FE 1 From the PC select Start Settings Control Panel Network Connections 2 Right click Local Area Connection to Fle Edt Wew Favortes Tools Advanced Hep Q O F ne open the Properties box f ide Dial up Ce Sonicwall SSL N A Natiixtender cL 3 From the list select Internet Protocol TCP IP and click Properties to open the TCP IP Properties box LAN or High Speed Dnternet or 8 i Broadcom Nettrom Gyste Ethernet f Se 4 Local Area Connection Properties General Advanced 4 Select Use the Following IP Address and Connect using Mg Broadcom NeCOreme Gigabi E theine sns teet a IP Address 192 168 205 100 gt eT ie b Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Comer Koern vade area network protocol that provides IP address 192 168 205 254 c Default Gateway Leave empty e M ins CEN 7 Show icon in natilication area when co od Dalah gatereay 7 Notily me when this connection has imited or
248. raps To add an IP Address to the list select the Add radio button enter the IP address into the address field a b c d and then click Save near the bottom of the tab When the page is refreshed the IP address you entered will appear in the Trap IP List To delete an IP address from the list select the Delete radio button enter the IP address to be deleted in the address field a b c d and click Save near the bottom of the tab MIB Three Viper MIB files are bundled with each Viper s firmware Click the Download mibs zip link to download a zip file that contains the three MIB files These files contain links to the SNMP information available in the Viper The MIB files must be loaded into a third party MIB browser Caution Certain MIB browsers standalone or integrated in an SNMP manager may require you to modify the MIB file s extension for example from MIB to TXT Each Viper firmware package is bundled with three MIB files found inside the mibs zip file 1 dataradio regs MIB contains a top level set of managed object definitions aimed at managing products with the former Dataradio brand 2 1213 MIB contains a set of managed object definitions aimed at managing TCP IP based network devices and 3 Viper scx mib contains a set of managed object definitions aimed at managing Viper radio modems For more information about MIB files included with the Viper firmware see APPENDIX G MIB File Below are the traps that
249. re any other power save modes available in the Viper that can utilize in my system No Currently there are no other power save modes available Can I use PSM on a Report by Exception system Yes A report by exception polling routine is an excellent opportunity to take advantage of PSM The Viper SC can be allowed to sleep until a condition occurs that triggers the PLC to send a response The radio can be awakened message sent response received and then PSM enabled again My system polling is based on strict controlled timed poll responses Is PSM of any advantage in this application Yes As an example each remote is polled every 60 minutes At the end of a polling cycle the SCADA server could issue a command to the PLC telling it to put the Viper radio to sleep for 55 minutes The Viper will go to sleep for 55 minutes then wake up again just before the next poll request is scheduled Email productsupport calamp com Phone 1 507 833 6701 Option 2 for Fixed narrowband and radio modem products Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 158 APPENDIX F NAT OVERVIEW NAT Network Address Translation is the process of modifying network address information in datagram IP packet headers while in transit across a traffic routing device for the purpose of remapping one IP address space into another Most often NAT is used in conjunction with network masquerading or IP masquerading which
250. remote Vipers ensure the device is installed correctly and securely to the housing unit Water should not be allowed in through this bulkhead mount Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 153 Feedline to PolyPhaser lightning surge protection device Remote Vipers i All cable connectors should be installed using manufacturer s guidelines ii Ensure all RF connections at the Viper and at the surge protector are hand tightened It is not recommended to use pliers or wrenches to tighten RF connectors TNC male matches to TNC female N male matches to N female etc Do not cross match TNC to N iii Ensure there are no tight bends in the cable Do not kink the cable Antenna feedline cable to antenna from PolyPhaser a At the tower site Cal mp recommends that the cable and antenna be analyzed to determine return loss A low return loss lower than 15 dB should be inspected and corrected b At the remote site CalAmp recommends that the cable and antenna be analyzed to determine return loss A low return loss lower than 15 dB should be inspected and corrected Site grounding All sites should have a system ground The base station or tower ground might be more intricate than at the remote sites The base station might have a grounding bed outside that the inside grounding network connects to In all cases the following devices should have their own grounding cable connecting to the system groun
251. rol The unique address a manufacturer assigns to each networking device MTU Maximum Transmission Unit The largest TCP IP packet that the hardware can carry NAT Network Address Translation NAT technology translates IP addresses of a local area network to a different IP address for the Internet Network A series of computers or devices connected for the purpose of data sharing storage and or transmission between users Network Speed Bit rate on the RF link between units in a network Node A network junction or connection point typically a computer or workstation OIP Optimized IP Compresses TCP and UDP headers and filters unnecessary acknowledgements OIP makes the most use of the available bandwidth OTA Over The Air Standard for the transmission and reception of application related information in a wireless communications system PHY A PHY chip also called a PHYceiver provides the interface to the Ethernet transmission medium Its purpose is digital access of the modulated link usually used together with an MII chip The PHY defines data rates and transmission method parameters Ping Packet InterNet Groper A network utility used to determine whether a particular IP address is online PLC Programmable Logic Controller An intelligent device that can make decisions gather and report information and control other devices PVID Port VLAN ID QoS Quality of Service refers to resource reservation
252. rop these packets keep them unchanged or tag them with PVID The default setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID 0 If exiting packets have a VLAN ID set to zero 0 you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag them with PVID or delete their tag The default setting is to silently drop the packet VID PVID The packet has a VLAN ID that is the same as the PVID If exiting packets have a VLAN ID that is the same as the PVID you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or delete their tag The default setting is to delete the tag VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID If exiting packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag the packets with PVID or delete their tag The default setting is to silently drop the packet Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab See the Note that follows Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note If you change the Port VLAN ID PVID for either serial port a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect as indicated by the yellow alert symbol AN Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 100 4 6 3 ADVANCED Advanced is the fourth right most tab of the Serial page To navigate to this tab select Serial from the main menu an
253. rovide options for configuring IP Gateway Service Settings for the COM Port and Setup Port For the COM Port options are also provided for configuring RTS CTS Mode Settings IP Gateway Service Each Serial port can be configured for one of several IP Gateway Services listed e The default setting for the COM Port is Serial RF bridge DOX mode e The default setting for the Setup Port is CLI Service CLI Command Line Interface Service This interface provides a command line interface over an RS 232 connection to a Hose PC Check with CalAmp Technical Support for advanced CLI information Serial RF Bridge DOX mode This is a three wire connection Data is sent whenever it is present at the port Flow control is not required The IP Gateway service will use UDP transport protocol to send and receive messages Serial RF Bridge RTS CTS mode This is a five wire connection Data is sent after the device raises the RTS and the Viper returns a CTS signal to the device Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 94 Online Diagnostics This is a TCP IP based RF diagnostics mode Displays the time interval in seconds when the Online Diagnostics string will be transmitted Custom Allows you to customize the IP settings by selecting this setting Choose the socket connection mode from the IP Gateway Transport list and configure the IP settings IP Gateway Transport TCP Client Lien Select one of
254. rsion of the firmware currently running on the Viper Unit Status Displays the status of the Viper and reports any errors Have the content of the displayed Unit Status message available when contacting CalAmp Technical Support This information is also required if returning a unit for service under an RMA IP Forwarding Mode Displays the IP Forwarding Mode whether the Viper is operating as a bridge or router The IP Forwarding Mode is configured in RF Network Settings RF Network Station Mode Displays whether the unit is configured to operate as a Relay Point Access Point or Remote The Station Mode is also configured in RF Network Settings RF Network DC Input Voltage Displays the system input voltage currently seen by the unit Transceiver Temperature Displays the transceiver input temperature The Viper can be configured to display temperature in Celsius or Fahrenheit in the Basic Settings tab VPN Status Displays the status of the VPN Virtual Private Network When operational will display OK Ready If the VPN is not operational Not Ready and the reason it is not operational will display Refresh Click Refresh to update the information displayed in the current tab Acknowledge Unit Status This button allows you to acknowledge and clear errors Errors remain stored even after cycling power to aid in troubleshooting intermittent faults Click the Acknowledge Unit Status button to return web page displays and unit S
255. ry where used could void the user s authority to operate the equipment When finished click Apply to save any settings you have made in this page and then click Next to proceed to Step 4 on the following page Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 37 3 7 4 SETUP WIZARD STEP 4 ENCRYPTION The page for Step 4 of the Viper Setup Wizard allows you to enable or disable encryption When enabled Viper uses AES 128 bit encryption to protect your data from eavesdropping and to prevent intruders from changing your configuration Use of encryption is optional but we strongly recommend it for actual networks The encryption pass phrase and key must be common to all units in a given network Figure 23 Viper Setup Wizard Step 4 Viper Setup Wizard Encryption dl O Enabled 9 Disabled Viper uses AES 128 bit encryption to protect your data from eavesdropping and to prevent intruders fram changing your configuration Use of encryption is optional but we strongly recommend it for actual networks The encryption phrase and key must be common to all units In a given network Encryption Pass Phrase h Cancel Quit Previous Hote The i symbol indicates that this parameter will require a Reset before it takes effect The default setting for encryption is Disabled and Vipers are typically shipped from the factory without an or with a blank Encryption Pass Phrase When finished click Apply to save any sett
256. s and they know there are certain details that must not be overlooked at any installation Most radio installations contain some form of lightning protection However the wrong combination of antenna and lightning arrestor can create high voltage transients on the radio s antenna port having devastating impacts on the life and reliability of modern day radio equipment 2 5 1 LIGHTNING ARRESTOR OVERVIEW Lightning arrestors can take many forms But some of the most common lightning arrestors use gas discharge tubes that turn on when the voltage across their terminals exceeds the specified threshold Under normal conditions these devices have very high impedance and no current flows through the device When the turn on voltage threshold is exceeded the gas discharge tube turns on instantaneously and becomes a short This functionality works well to limit the magnitude of a transient from a nearby lightning discharge However it can have very negative consequences if a gas discharge lightning arrestor is used with the wrong antenna Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 21 2 5 2 ANTENNA OVERVIEW Antennas can come in just about any shape or size However there is one parameter in particular that the system designer should not overlook especially if the radio installation uses gas discharge tube lightning arrestors The parameter is the DC grounding of the active element in the antenna A DC grounded an
257. s and egress packets based on their VLAN ID VID tag or absence of a VID tag VID is the VLAN ID contained in the packet PVID is the Port VLAN ID the VLAN ID associated with the interface and configured in the Viper Web Interface Ingress Packet Untagged The packet has no VLAN ID tag If incoming packets are untagged you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or tag the packets with the PVID The default setting is to tag the packet with the PVID Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 99 VID 0 If incoming packets have a VLAN ID set to zero 0 you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag the packets with the PVID or delete their tag The default setting is to silently drop the packet VID PVID The packet has a VLAN ID that is the same as the PVID If incoming packets have a VLAN ID that is the same as the PVID you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or delete their tag The default setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID If incoming packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag the packets with PVID or delete their tag The default setting is to silently drop the packet Egress Packet Untagged The packet has no VLAN ID tag If exiting packets are untagged you can choose to silently d
258. s data received on the serial port AND there are no TCP connections already established Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 95 Table 15 TCP UDP Parameter Usage Local IP Address Local Port Number Remote IP Address Remote Port Number TCP Keepalive UDP Mode REQUIRED Value Automatic Let the IP stack decide Ethernet IP address of the Ethernet interface RF IP address of the RF interface REQUIRED Value 1 65535 Do not use 20 21 23 123 520 or 5002 REQUIRED Value Unicast IP address OR Broadcast IP address OR Multicast IP address REQUIRED Value 1 65535 TCP Client Mode REQUIRED Value Automatic Let the IP stack decide Ethernet IP address of the Ethernet interface RF IP address of the RF interface UNUSED Value IP stack decides the value REQUIRED Value Unicast IP address based on Local IP selection for TCP reply message REQUIRED Value 1 65535 OPTIONAL Value 0 1440 minutes 0 TCP Keepalive is disabled TCP Server Mode REQUIRED Value Automatic Let the IP stack decide Ethernet IP address of the Ethernet interface RF IP address of the RF interface REQUIRED Value 1 65535 Do not use 20 21 23 123 520 or 5002 REQUIRED Value N A REQUIRED Value 1 65535 OPTIONAL Value 0 1440 minutes 0 TCP Keepalive is dis
259. s the amount of traffic received and sent by each of the three interfaces Ethernet Serial and RF The tab also reports statistics gathered from the airlink that can indicate the quality of the RF links Note Definitions that follow in this section for use in this tab use the following conventions e Rx or Input data received from a lower network layer e Tx or Output data transmitted to a lower network layer Cycling power to the Viper or clicking Clear Zero Interface Stats will reset all statistics to zero Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 114 Port Name LAN Indicates that statistics in this section are for the port named LAN the Ethernet port Rx Pkts The total number of incoming packets received by the Ethernet interface LAN Tx Pkts The total number of outgoing packets transmitted by the Ethernet interface LAN Bytes and packets statistics for the Serial ports are presented in two columns left and right for each of the ports Statistics listed in the eft column are for the Setup serial port Statistics listed in the right column are for the COM port Rx Bytes Total number of incoming bytes received by the Setup or COM port Tx Bytes Total number of outgoing bytes transmitted by the Setup or COM port RxPkts Total number of incoming packets received by the Setup or COM port TxPkts Total number of outgoing packets transmitted by the Setup or COM port
260. sed when traffic is coming back from the public network to the private network The user can select which of two interfaces Ethernet or RF will be considered private The following examples illustrate how to configure the Vipers The examples use a private network of 192 168 205 x and a public network of 172 31 5 x ETHERNET INTERFACE PRIVATE The following figure shows NAT enabled for the Ethernet interface Figure 84 NAT Enabled Ethernet Interface Private Router Routing Table NAT VTS NAT Enabled Disabled 192 168 205 0 255 255 255 0 nr 10 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 USERI 0 0 0 0 USER2 0 0 0 USER3 44 0 0 0 Clear T able A sp jo Al xo jo A sp Ho wo Jj xb lo Save Cancel If you Save changes te any parameters marked PON you wil need to reset the unit for them te take effect Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 160 The preceding figure shows the Viper configured protect the Viper 1 Ethernet interface IP address from hosts located on a public network The following figure shows what this looks like Figure 85 NAT Enabled Ethernet Interface Private Private Network Public Network Host 1 Host 2 Eth 192 168 205 2 Eth 172 31 5 2 Viper 1 NAT Enabled 192 168 205 24 Viper 2 NAT Disabled RF 10 0 14 203 Etherent 192 168 205 1 RF 10 0 14 186 Etherent 172 31 5 1 Ethernet Private An IP packet whose source IP address ori
261. ses or Subnets can be specified and will be hidden by the Network Address table when the IP Address and Netmask are entered into the row and enabled Clear Table Click Clear Table to clear all entries from the NAT Private Network Table This table allows entry of specific public ports or ranges of ports to be forwarded to the private network hidden by the Network Address Translation table Clear Table Click Clear Table to clear all entries from the NAT Port Forwarding Table Save Click Save to save the change if you enable or change any of the settings in this tab See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any change you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note If you change the NAT Enabled or Disabled setting in this tab a reset of the Viper is required before the setting Will take effect as indicated by the yellow alert symbol A For more information about Network Address Translation NAT capabilities of the Viper and how it is implemented in the Viper router including an overview and examples see APPENDIX F NAT Overview 4 5 3 VTS VTS Virtual Terminal Server is the third right most tab of the Router page To navigate to this tab select Router from the main menu and click VTS From this tab you can configure the Virtual Terminal Server parameters The Virtual Terminal Server VTS is an application running inside the Viper that creates two socket endpoints One socket endpoint is called l
262. some pages of the web interface to display correctly The Viper SC IP Router Web interface is divided into two sections In the left pane is the main navigation menu On the right is the content area for the page The navigation menu on the left allows you to navigate to configuration pages for the Viper SC Router For quick setup of a few key parameters select Setup Wizard at the bottom of the main menu The remainder of this chapter will take you through configuration pages of the Setup Wizard More advanced information about parameters available for selection and configuration in all of the tabbed pages is provided in the following chapter To access online Help for content of a specific tab in the Viper Web Interface click the Help link near the top of the page while in the tab Toreturn to the Home page Unit Status tab from any tab in the Viper Web Interface click the Home link For some settings a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect These settings are indicated by a yellow alert symbol A Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 33 3 7 INITIAL CONFIGURATION USING THE SETUP WIZARD The first page of the Setup Wizard displays navigation information for the wizard Figure 19 Setup Wizard Welcome and Instructions Garam Viper SCY IP Router HELP HOME RESET Setup Wizard Welcome to the Viper quick setup Wizard You have to cover all steps from first to
263. specify the maximum number of time slots that the viper will wait before it starts transmitting If the Viper detects that another unit started transmitting before itself it will wait until their data transmission is complete before tries to capture the air again Each time slot is equal to the time that it takes to complete a collision avoidance two way handshake If the user specifies a random backoff of 4 then the Viper will wait up to a maximum of 4 time slots before it starts its transmission On each new transmission the Viper radio will randomly pick a time slot from the time slot number zero up to the maximum time slot to begin its transmission Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 54 Normally the random backoff should be set higher for systems that may have a lot of contention Random backoff can be disabled for systems that have a very controlled traffic pattern where two or more Vipers are not expected to try to transmit at the same time This parameter is often set equal to the estimated number of Vipers in the system that my try to start transmitting at the same time When enabled this feature on average adds latency to each transmission The latency will be noticeable when conducting a standard Ping test as the total Ping time will increase and be more variable in nature Valid settings for random backoff are values in the range of zero off to ten 0 to 10 inclusive The default setting
264. sses identified in this list will be forwarded from the LAN interface to the RF interface All packets received from the RF interface with a multicast destination IP address matching one of the multicast addresses identified in this list will be forwarded from the RF interface to the LAN interface If this list is empty any packet received from the RF interface with a multicast destination IP address will be passed over the LAN If this list is not empty any packet received from the RF interface with a multicast destination IP address that does not match an entry in this list will be dropped Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 78 4 4 5 VLAN VLAN Virtual Local Area Network is the fifth second from left tab of the LAN Settings page To navigate to this tab select LAN Settings from the main menu and click VLAN This tab contains configuration settings for VLAN set up through the LAN Settings are similar to those in the VLAN tab shown earlier for the RF Network Settings except settings in this page are for VLAN on the LAN interface Settings in the previous VLAN tab were for VLAN on the RF interface VLAN 802 1Q is operational in bridge mode only Router mode allows tagged mode only and advanced options for specifying behavior based
265. static routing packet forwarding 1 2 OPERATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS Viper has the following operational characteristics e Frequency range of 136 174 MHz 215 240 MHz 406 1125 470 MHz 450 511 975 MHz 880 902 or 928 960 MHz e 142 174 MHz 406 1125 470 MHz and 450 511 975 MHz frequency ranges certified for European Union ETSI EN300 113 e 142 174 MHz 406 1125 470 MHz and 450 511 975 MHz frequency ranges certified for Australia New Zealand ACMA AS NZS 4925 2004 Spectrum Impact Assessment e User selectable data rates up to 256 kbps 100 kHz e Wide input power range of 10 to 30 V DC e Built in transceiver adjustable from 1 to 10 W 8 W max for 900MHz e Used as an access point or an end point with each configurable in the following a Bridge mode for quick setup of units on same network or b Router mode for advanced networks e Embedded web server to access status and or setup information e Remote access for over the air system firmware upgrades e Advanced AES 128 bit data encryption and security designed to meet FIPS 140 2 requirements e Superior data compression zlib compression algorithm applies to Serial and IP connections e Native UDP and TCP IP support e Online and Offline Diagnostics e Supports up to 32 different frequency channel pairs e Rugged die cast aluminum and steel case e UL Certified when powered by a listed Class 2 source Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 1
266. step of the Viper Setup Wizard or later in the RF Network tab of the RF Network Settings page Instructions for completing the Viper Setup Wizard and for configuration options in the Viper Web Interface tabbed pages are provided later in this User Manual Figure 6 Extending coverage areas by configuring the Viper SC as a relay point Viper 2 Relay Point Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 13 2 2 IP FORWARDING MODES All Ethernet capable devices or hosts have at least one IP address and a subnet mask assigned to it The IP address identifies a specific device and the subnet mask tells the device which other IP addresses it can directly communicate with When any host needs to communicate with another device that is not within the same local area network it will first send the data packet to the gateway or router The gateway or router will forward the packet to the desired location Often times a packet will pass through several gateways or routers to get to its final destination The Viper SC has two different modes of operation e Bridge Mode Bridge mode is for quick setup of units all on the same network e Router Mode Router mode is for advanced networks Both of these modes are explained in the sections that follow 2 2 1 BRIDGE MODE Bridge mode is the simplest configuration for all Viper networks Viper may be configured for bridge mode only when all devices are located on the same
267. stined for that unit will be transmitted the maximum number of times since the packet is never correctly received Continually transmitting and retransmitting packets to an unreachable remote will reduce available bandwidth to the remaining functional Vipers Setting data retries to zero yields the maximum throughput since no RF acknowledgement s are transmitted over the air However enabling data retries will provide the maximum level of reliability of the network Valid settings for data retries are values in the range of zero off to ten 0 to 10 inclusive The default setting is 2 Note When Data Retries is set to Off the unit is in No Acks Required mode All other settings enable Acknowledgements Collision Avoidance When enabled the collision avoidance feature will transmit a short two way handshake between the transmitting and receiving Viper This tells any adjacent Vipers that a data transmission will be taking place Adjacent Vipers will wait until the data transmission is complete before they try to capture the air by sending a new packet This feature is particularly useful when remote Vipers are located at sites where they are unable to hear each other transmit directly and both remotes want to transmit data to the same base station at the same time In this scenario they may often try to transmit at the same time yielding a corrupted message at the base station The two way handshake reserves airtime from the network for
268. t is receiving noise the Viper will go ahead and transmit If it is receiving valid data the Viper will wait until the complete packet has been received before transmitting The Viper will typically take 5 to 250 ms to determine if it is receiving data or just noise Disabled The Viper will attempt to receive and decode data when the received RF level is above the carrier sense threshold When the Viper has data to transmit it will immediately transmit the data The Viper will immediately stop receiving packets and will transmit over any other Vipers that are on the air and over any interference that may be present This mode should only be used in a polling type environment where the user has strict control over the traffic that is generated Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab See Note below Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note t is the user s responsibility of the user to check his or her FCC license or applicable regulatory agency for the country or geographical area in which the Viper will be operated to determine the correct parameters and settings for the channel frequencies power level and bandwidth Selecting a frequency range or transmit power that is out of compliance in the country where used could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 47 4 2
269. t most tab of the Radio Settings page To navigate to this tab select Radio Settings from the main menu and click RF Tests In this tab you can generate and send Test Tones display the SINAD meter reading or conduct a Ping Test and Command Response Figure 31 Radio Settings RF Tests Radio Settings RF Settings CWID RF Tests Choose test tone C Unmodulated and p Start Test Random Data Test lasts 20 second S cont 1KHz Sine Wave Please allow time maybe 20 seconds to handle slow or non responding targets Note This test may cause other Vipers to stop transmitting for the duration of the test tone if they have been configured to Listen Before Transmit since the test tone selected may be noise Unmodulated or 1 kHz Sine Wave or data Random Data Test Tones Allows a tone to be transmitted for testing purposes The test tone will be transmitted for 20 seconds after the Start Test button is clicked unless the Stop Test button is clicked which will stop transmitting the test tone Three test tones are available Unmodulated Random Data 1 kHz Sine Wave Only one of these three types of test tone may be transmitted for each test Once the type of test tone is selected Click Start Test to start transmitting The selected tone will be transmitted for 20 seconds Click Stop Test if it is necessary to stop transmission of the test tone before 20 seconds Viper SC IP
270. tatus LED function to normal operation Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 41 4 1 2 RF STATUS The RF Status tab is the second middle tab of the Home page of the Viper Web interface To view this tab select Home from the main navigation menu or click Home and click RF Status From this tab you can view RF Status information for the Viper router Figure 27 Home RF Status tab Home Unit Status RF Status Basic Settings RFStatus 0000000000 RF IP Address 310 128 0 1 RF MAC Address 60 00 01 RX Frequency 217 950000 MHz TX Frequency 219 950000 MHz Transmit Power Level 1 0 Watts PA Forward Power 1 0 Watts normal PA Reverse Power 00 Watts normal Data Packet Bit Rate 16 Kbps Modulation 4 FSK Control Packet Bit Rate 16 Kbps Modulation 4 FSK Bandwidth 12 5 KHz Multi Speed Enabled Mode ANSI Refresh RF IP Address The RF IP Address default is assigned by the factory based on the unit s MAC address is the IP address that is used when sending data and control packets in the Viper radio IP network The RF IP Address can be configured in RF Network Settings RF Network RF MAC Address The MAC address assigned to the Viper radio interface by the factory RX Frequency The operating frequency currently being used for receiving data and control packets TX Frequency The operating frequency currently being used for transmitting data and control packets Transmit Power L
271. tegrated in an SNMP manager may require you to modify the MIB file s extension for example from MIB to TXT The three MIB files found inside the mibs zip file are 1 dataradio regs MIB contains a top level set of managed object definitions aimed at managing products provided under the Dataradio brand 2 1213 MIB contains a set of managed object definitions aimed at managing TCP IP based network devices and 3 Viper_scx mib contains a set of managed object definitions aimed at managing Viper radio modems Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 168 OID In SNMP each object has a unique OID consisting of numbers separated by decimal points These object identifiers form a tree like structure The following figure illustrates this tree like structure for the dataradio regs mib MIB which comes bundled with the Viper firmware A path to any object can be traced starting from the root top of the tree For example the object titled dataradio has a unique OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 3732 The MIB associates each OID with a label in this example dataradio and various other parameters When an SNMP manager wants to obtain information on an object it will assemble a specific message for example GET packet that includes the OID of the object of interest If the OID is found a response packet is assembled and sent back If the OID is not found a special error response is sent that identifies the un
272. tenna will measure 0 ohms from the active element to ground when tested with an ohm meter One way to test this is to connect the ohm meter from the center conductor to ground of the RF cable that is attached directly to the antenna This will read as a short for a DC grounded antenna and as an open for a non DC grounded antenna Note Some antenna datasheets are misleading and will indicate the antenna is DC grounded However the datasheet may be referring to the body of the antenna and not necessarily the active element For this reason it is best to measure the antenna you plan to use to verify the active element is DC grounded 2 5 3 THE WRONG COMBINATION The combination of a DC open antenna and a DC blocked gas discharge tube lightning arrestor creates a situation where static charge can build up slowly on the active element of the antenna Static charge can be created by wind blowing across the antenna precipitation hitting the active element or other environmental causes As static charge builds up on the antenna s active element over a period of minutes or even hours the DC blocking capacitor inside the lightning arrestor is charged Figure 14 Voltage buildup due to static Static charge slowly builds up on The voltage on the radio s antenna antenna and lightning arrestor port is held at 0 V DC Open Antenna DC blocking cap Transmitter Static Bleed DC Blocking Off Resistor Lightning Arrestor Receiver G
273. the LED off periods when data is not moving across the RF network at full rated speed LED off periods indicate the application has not presented data to the Viper radio modem Using different client server combinations or applications may show improvements For example one FTP server may work 3096 faster than another the buffer management is quicker to respond or has larger message buffers and yet run at nearly the same speed over a pure Ethernet no RF link Network Address Translation NAT payload data compression and encryption have little effect other than adding a small latency to the flow of traffic 5 2 MAXIMIZING THROUGHPUT WITH A WEAK RF LINK 5 2 1 USE ROUTER MODE WITH RF ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS ENABLED Selecting Router mode is highly recommended when running over a weak RF link This mode ensures that only the necessary packets are passed over the RF interface Using bridge mode often results in passing more traffic than necessary In router mode you have options to enable Data Retries and enable Collision Avoidance to improve the network performance The Data Retries and Collision Avoidance mechanisms are also available in bridge mode when communication spans only one RF hop Router mode requires some IP route planning to and from Viper units but is well worth the increase in link stability over the simple bridge mode 5 2 2 REDUCE RF NETWORK BIT RATE The Viper SC has up to four speeds of operation available for each of t
274. the above settings have been changed they must be saved and the Viper must then be rebooted for the new settings to take effect Advanced Settings Show or Hide Click Show to show advanced settings in the lower part of the tab click Hide to hide the advanced settings Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab See Note below Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 79 Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Note If you change the Mode Port VLAN ID or Member of Management VLAN setting in this tab as indicated by the yellow alert symbol UN a reset of the Viper is required before the setting will take effect 4 4 5 1 ADVANCED SETTINGS FOR LAN SETTINGS VLAN When you click Show to show the advanced settings in the VLAN tab of the LAN Settings page the tab expands downward to show the advanced settings The following figure shows the Advanced Settings section when the Viper is configured for Router mode Bridge mode is less restrictive Advanced Settings for Untagged Port mode are fewer than for Tagged Port mode because controls are available in Tagged Port mode for maintaining and displaying a VLAN Member Table Figure 49 LAN Settings VLAN tab showing Advanced Settings only when Untagged Port is selected Advanced Settings Show Hide Silently Keep Tag Delete Drop Packet Packet Tag Packet Unchange
275. the packet transmission It will however add a small fixed latency to each packet The added latency is small relative to the time it takes to transmit a large packet when the chance of collision is greatest However when short packets need to be transmitted it can sometimes take just as long to complete the two way handshake as it does to send the short packet For this reason the collision avoidance parameter allows the user to specify the packet size threshold above which the two way handshake is implemented For example if the Collision Avoidance is set for 128 the Viper will complete a two way handshake before sending packets that are larger than 128 bytes reducing potential congestion The Viper will not complete the two way handshake before sending packets that are smaller than 128 bytes improving throughput Setting collision avoidance to a value of 1500 or above effectively disables the feature as the maximum data packet size is 1500 Bytes Valid settings are Off or values in the range from O to 512 inclusive The default value is 128 Random Backoff When a data transmission competes in a busy network there may be several new Vipers waiting to send data If all of these Vipers start transmitting at the exact same time collisions will occur To reduce the chance that more than one Viper starts transmitting at a time the user can enable a random backoff The Viper will randomly pick a time slot to begin its transmission The user can
276. this equipment must ensure the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit an RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population Viper SC uses a low power radio frequency transmitter The concentrated energy from an antenna may pose a health hazard People should not be in front of the antenna when the transmitter is operating The installer of this equipment must ensure the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit an RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population Recommended safety guidelines for the human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy are contained in the Canadian Safety Code 6 available from Health Canada the Federal Communications Commission FCC Bulletin 65 and the Council of the European Union s Recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields O Hz to 300 GHz 1999 519 EC Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page Caution Before you deploy your system you must read and understand Section 2 5 Selecting Antenna and Lightning Arrestor combinations Exigences de conformit d exposition aux Radiofr quences SCADA L unit Viper SC doit tre install e par un professionnel et doit assurer une distance minimale de s paration entre les sources radiantes et toute personne Les distances sont indiqu es dans le tableau ci dessous L installation typi
277. tifications Model Number Frequency Range FCC IC DOC European Union Australia New EN 300 113 Zealand 140 5018 500 140 5018 501 136 174 MHz NP4 5018 500 773B 5018500 manm 140 5018 502 140 5018 503 136 174 MHz NP4 5018 500 773B 5018502 a ACMA AS NZS 4925 DL 142 174 MHz C 15880 2004 Spectrum 140 5018 601 Impact Assessment 140 5028 502 140 5028 503 Meque 215 240 MHz NP45028504 773B 5028504 o om j P ME 406 1 470 MHz NP4 5048 300 773B 5048300 BEEN RN EE 406 1125 470 MHz NP4 5048 300 773B 5048302 a 3 ACMA AS NZS 4925 dons 406 1125 470 MHz C 15880 2004 Spectrum Impact Assessment M S ten aoe 450 512 MHz NP4 5048 300 773B 5048300 a eae oes 450 512 MHz NP4 5048 300 773B 5048302 a a 215 240 MHz NP4 5028 502 773B 5028502 ACMA AS NZS 4925 pau E C 1588 D 2004 Spectrum Impact Assessment M E E 928 960 MHz NP4 5098 500 773B 5098500 ___ I1 2 x xk EE ee 928 960 MHz NP4 5098 502 773B 5098502 i eque 928 960 MHz NP45098504 773B 5098504 UL Certification All models UL approved when powered with a listed Class 2 source This device is suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C and D or non hazardous locations only This device is intended for installation only in a RESTRICTED ACCESS LOCATION per EN60950 1 2006 Obsolete models EndofLife in 2014 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Re
278. tility the configuration file will appear as a selection in the drop down menu shown in preceding figure Note An FTP utility is a separate application the customer must install on his or her PC CalAmp does not supply an FTP utility Notes about Viper Configuration files and file names e Valid characters that can be used in the file name are a z A Z 0 9 and _ File names must not contain a space character Because many operating systems and file systems see the space character as a delimiter or separator using a space in a file name is generally a bad idea Use the underscore character _ instead as shown in the sample file names e File names are case sensitive Test drp is not the same as test drp nor is TeST drp or other similar combinations and each may likely contain configuration settings that differ from each other e All file names must end with the drp extension The cloned configuration file may be renamed if desired but it must not have any space characters in the file name and it must keep the drp extension to be recognized by the Viper as a possible valid configuration file e Do not load more than five 5 separate configuration files into a single Viper Loading many configuration files into a Viper ma use up an excessive amount of memory and may cause the Viper to malfunction After saving the configuration file back into the Viper using an FTP client follow the instructions for Using CalAmp Pre Provided Cann
279. tion Maximum Throughput Maximum Reliability More Info TCP Proxy O Enabled Disabled Duplicate Packet Removal Enabled 9 Disabled Everything IP and ARP types only TCP Bridge Forwarding UDP Fragment Other Cancel If you Save changes te any parameters marked fy you wil need te reset the unit for them to take effect These are bandwidth management selectors These selections allow the user to tune the device parameters based on the desired network operation Selections toward the left favor minimum latency and maximum throughput selections toward the right favor minimum congestion and maximum reliability You may select from the numerical values offered or select Custom and enter any whole number values within the range shown Data Retries When data retries are enabled the receiving Viper will reply with a very short RF acknowledge message each time a unicast data packet is received correctly The RF acknowledge allows the transmitting Viper to Verify that the packet was received successfully This does however add a small amount of latency to each packet reducing overall throughput If the transmitting Viper does not receive an RF acknowledge it will retransmit the message again up to the maximum number of data retries specified Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 53 If a remote Viper becomes completely unreachable or is disconnected all packets de
280. tional antennas should be used at the remote end of the link They confine the transmission and reception pattern to a comparatively narrow beam which minimizes interference to and from stations located outside the pattern 3 If interference is suspected from another system it may be helpful to use antenna polarization opposite to the interfering system s antennas An additional 20 dB or more of attenuation to interference can be achieved by using opposite antenna polarization 4 Check with your CalAmp sales representative or CalAmp Technical Services for additional options The Technical Services group has qualified personnel to help resolve your RF issues Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 27 3 GETTING STARTED QUICK SETUP AND INITIAL CONFIGURATION These instructions allow you to setup a Viper SC so you will be able to verify basic unit operation and experiment with network designs and configurations To eliminate unnecessary disruption of traffic on the existing network while you become familiar with the Viper SC you should use a network IP subnet address that does not overlap with subnets currently in use in your test area 3 1 INSTALL THE ANTENNA An Rx Tx antenna is required for basic operation For demo units only connect the antennas as shown in the following figure to provide stable radio communications between demo devices Figure 16 Demo Antenna Assembly Attenuator 20 dB
281. to electromagnetic fields O Hz to 300 GHz 1999 519 EC Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance in the country where used could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Exigences de conformit d exposition aux Radiofr quences SCADA L unit Viper SC doit tre install e par un professionnel et doit assurer une distance minimale de s paration entre les sources radiantes et toute personne Les distances sont indiqu es dans le tableau ci dessous L installation typique est une antenne de type fouet Exposition aux 1 2 longueur d onde install e sur un poteau ou pyl ne Radiofr quences Distance de s curit minimum Gain de Antenne TH uissanceem ma f sasi 10dBi 15dBi 132 MHz VHF La radio Viper SC est destin e tre utilis dans les march s contr les industriels et e 215 MHz UHF 406 1 Mii 900 MHz Mod le 140 5098 304 Note est de la responsabilit de l utilisateur de garantir le respect des r glements MPE de la FCC lorsque vous utilisez cet appareil d une facon autre que celle d crite ci dessus L installateur doit s assurer que l antenne est situ e ou orient e de facon ne pas mettre un champ RF d passant les limites de radiations pour la population g n rale tablies par Sant Canada La radio Viper SC utilise un metteur radiofr quence faible puissance L nergie concentr e d une antenne peut poser un risque
282. to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or delete their tag The default setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID If incoming packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag the packets with PVID or delete their tag The default setting is to silently drop the packet Egress Packet Untagged The packet has no VLAN ID tag If exiting packets are untagged you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or tag them with PVID The default setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID 0 If exiting packets have a VLAN ID set to zero 0 you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag them with PVID or delete their tag The default setting is to silently drop the packet VID PVID The packet has a VLAN ID that is the same as the PVID If exiting packets have a VLAN ID that is the same as the PVID you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or delete their tag The default setting is to delete the tag VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID If exiting packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag the packets with PVID or delete their tag The default setting is to silently drop the packet Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab See th
283. troller Board for Base Station nnn 155 RE Cornneectivity and Protocol TesStitig si oto Crest a ERES Yale d ERE RN E urblade o tcu O te bau EIE RIS E vbi ERUNT E poU idus MER Lou PUMP T die 155 APPENDIX E Viper SC Power Save MOde ccccssscssssressssscscsssscccssssscavsccccessencusrescassseceessencusns 156 Powers5qve Mode PAGOS ecoute aii ese tesa utt eb e uehast to insu Ud eae testes ua mcd se caput ee renes OI UD s a EE oS 158 APPENDPCE JINATOVepVIQWU eui E end Esn beu eH Nola db uc oni iucus banus Rai tenu bos da nud 159 MXN e c 160 Ethernet ntertace Private eun tas amv doeet e uet ia ets wan ou rd a t cte astu uidi bonam A su ur tesa Munt ced teet 160 RRINE aCe PEVA Os debe idee sen tutis suerte muda b rete apeduvcex tuto bb afuit tute duni iui lied eee teg uet o ciun emm ceu Sine dri me 162 Jar NAT EF UIUC S cnr ir ieu er aster ene alas PURA Un Na vs 0p ER a Vere Ua Aou val ca RU GUN nna cana rh und o cu edu TUR POR UU 165 NAT Port FOrWdPalfe sede duda tetii teda tet dtu tetetel embed N E dee cecsataune 166 APPENDIX G MIB FIE OVENI EW sox iurium BoEotoes ovr ao ois rod He PUDE ELE iden ora io Ud o v uina Ie ES olde n EDU PEM CL Nr baUd 168 APPENDIX H VLAN Introduction ccccccsssessssscccsssscncusucncassccvsestencususucasssecsessencussencavscecsessencusns 171 VLAN Tagging and Umage Tig siete erbe E ato Bb b x a rod eec abad ee utate duo t sonat batis es 171 MIEADDTOBBIDB sentem taEO either Lot nace end nius tuam ice eed
284. ueue When the high priority queue is set this queue will be processed first when transmitting and once per every two other queues Restore QoS Defaults Click to restore default configuration settings for RF Transmit Queues Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab Settings in this section allow you to define up to 128 QoS filters to classify the packets in the various RF transmit queues The following fields are used to define filters VLAN ID The VLAN identifier is used only if operating in bridge mode Source IP Address Use this to specify a range of IP addresses that will represent valid source IP addresses For example 200 200 200 0 24 200 200 200 1 32 Source Port The UDP TCP source port number A value of 0 means any value Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 70 Destination IP Address Use this to specify a range of IP addresses that will represent valid destination IP addresses For example 200 200 200 0 24 200 200 200 1 32 Destination Port The UDP TCP destination port number A value of 0 means any value DSCP The Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP consists of the six 6 most significant bits of the eight bit Type of Service ToS field in the IP header Select Any to not filter by this value The following table contains DSCP values and
285. ul the response times appear in the text box when complete Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 50 4 3 RF NETWORK SETTINGS The RF Network Settings page contains seven tabs RF Network RF Bandwidth Management Neighbor Table Global Settings VLAN QoS for Quality of Service and QoS Statistics 4 3 1 RF NETWORK RF Network is the first left most tab of the RF Network Settings page To navigate to this tab select RF Network Settings from the main menu The RF Network tab allows you to configure settings for the Viper RF network Figure 32 RF Network Settings RF Network RF Network RF Settings Network RF Bandwidth Neighbor Global Management Table oO os VLAN QoS E Statistics Settings IP Forwarding Mode dy Access Point Relay Point Multi Speed Mode RF IP Address RF Netmaskl RF MAC Add ress dl MTU s Bridge 9 Router O Yes 9No OQ Yes 9No Disabled Enabled 10 0 1 2 default 10 128 50 134 default 255 0 0 0 Default Custom 503286 default 80 32 86 bytes default 1500 bytes Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked PN you will need to reset the unit for them to take effect IP Forwarding Mode Select whether this Viper will operate as a bridge or router The default setting is Router Access Point Select whether this Viper will be an Access Point The Access Point is the default
286. ult setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID 0 If exiting packets have a VLAN ID set to zero 0 you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag them with PVID or delete their tag The default setting is to silently drop the packet VID PVID If exiting packets have a VLAN ID that is in the VLAN Member Table you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or delete their tag The default setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID but VID is in Table If exiting packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID but is in the VLAN Member Table you can choose to silently drop these packets or keep them unchanged retag their packets or delete their tags The default setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID and VID is not in Table If exiting packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID and is not in the VLAN Member Table you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged retag the packets or delete their tags The default setting is to keep the packet unchanged Save Click Save to save any changes you have made in this tab See the Note that follows Cancel Click Cancel to cancel any changes you may have made to any of the settings in this tab VLAN Membership controls and VLAN Member table appear below only in Tagged Port mode Add VLAN ID To Table To add a VLAN ID enter t
287. ult setting is to tag the packet with the PVID For Tagged Port Mode the default setting is to keep the packet unchanged Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 66 VID 0 If incoming packets have a VLAN ID set to zero 0 you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag the packets with the PVID or delete their tag For both modes Untagged Port Mode and Tagged Port Mode the default setting is to silently drop the packet VID PVID The packet has a VLAN ID that is the same as the PVID If incoming packets have a VLAN ID that is the same as the PVID you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged or delete their tag For both modes Untagged Port Mode and Tagged Port Mode the default setting is to keep the packet unchanged VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID If incoming packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged re tag the packets with PVID or delete their tag The default for this setting which is for Untagged Port Mode only is to silently drop the packet VID PVID VID is not equal to PVID but VID is in Table Tagged Port Mode only If incoming packets have a VLAN ID that is not the same as the PVID but is in the VLAN Member Table you can choose to silently drop these packets keep them unchanged retag the packets or delete their tags The default for this setting whi
288. ultispeed networking is in the first step of the Viper Setup Wizard or later in the RF Network tab of the RF Network Settings page Instructions for completing the Viper Setup Wizard and for configuration options in the Viper Web Interface tabbed pages are provided later in this User Manual Figure 13 Viper SC Base Station with remote Vipers configured with different OTA data rates Viper Multispeed Base Station x 7 SCADA Istribution Automation AMI Backhau 2 3 UNDERSTANDING RF PATH REQUIREMENTS Radio waves are propagated when electrical energy produced by a radio transmitter is converted into magnetic energy by an antenna Magnetic waves travel through space The receiving antenna intercepts a very small amount of this magnetic energy and converts it back into electrical energy that is amplified by the radio receiver The indicator of strength of signal energy received by the receiver is called the Received Signal Strength Indication RSSI and is expressed in dBm A radio modem requires minimum amount of received RF signal to operate reliably and provide adequate data throughput This is the radio receiver s sensitivity In most cases spectrum regulators will define or limit the amount of signal that can be transmitted and it will be noted in the FCC license This is the effective isotropic radiated power EIRP Transmitted power decays with distance and other factors as it moves away from the transmitting antenna Viper SC IP Ro
289. uses two IP addresses e An Ethernet IP Address e An RF IP Address Every Viper is factory configured with a default Ethernet IP Address 192 168 205 1 and a unique RF IP address This RF IP address will have the form 10 x y z where x y and z is based on the last 6 digits of the unit s Ethernet MAC address The default network is 10 0 0 0 8 In Router mode each Viper must have its Ethernet IP Address on a unique network and all Vipers must have their RF IP addresses on the same network For consistent and reliable communication the RF network addresses should not overlap or contain any of the IP Addresses in the Ethernet network Router Mode Example 1 In this example each Viper has an Ethernet IP address on a unique network For Vipers 1 82 and 3 each network connected to their local Ethernet ports has 254 valid IP addresses that may be assigned to other hosts The network connected to Viper 4 s local Ethernet port has 65534 valid IP addresses Note 1 All Vipers RF IP addresses are on the same network Because they are using the 10 0 0 0 8 network all Vipers may use the default RF IP address programmed by the factory Note2 All the Viper Ethernet IP addresses are on different networks Note3 Computers PLCs RTUs or other Ethernet capable devices can be connected up to each Viper s local Ethernet interface That device must be set with an IP address on the same network as the Ethernet interface of the Viper it is connected with
290. ut obtaining and installing the SNMP feature SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is the third middle tab of the Diagnostics page When the appropriate feature key is installed in the Viper to enable this feature select Diagnostics from the main menu and click SNMP to navigate to this tab SNMP is used by network management systems to manage and monitor network attached devices and provides a means to monitor collect and analyze diagnostic information Viper is compatible with SNMPv2c SNMP allows you to access IP statistics and diagnostics from the Viper using third party MIB Management Information Base browser software The Viper can be programmed to respond to SNMP queries to its local IP Address RF or Ethernet IP address Automatic or respond to its Ethernet IP address Ethernet or respond to its RF IP Address RF Use the options and settings in this tab to enable or disable the SNMP agent configure SNMP settings and enable or disable alarms for power conditions Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 117 Figure 70 SNMP Model Manager and Agent MANAGER Human Nework Network Manager Protocol a Messages Management Database Management Database Managed Object Traps or alarms will be automatically generated whenever the forward or reverse power goes out of specification These traps can be sent to a user specified IP address or addresses Figure 71 Diagnostics SNMP
291. uter for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 20 2 4 SITE SELECTION AND SITE SURVEY 2 4 1 SITE SELECTION For a successful installation careful thought must be given to selecting the site for each radio These requirements can be quickly determined in most cases Suitable sites should provide the following e Protection from direct weather exposure e A source of adequate and stable primary power e Suitable entrances for antenna interface or other cabling e Antenna location with an unobstructed transmission path to all remote radios in the system 2 4 2 SITE SURVEY A Site Survey is an RF propagation study of the RF path between two points or between one point and multiple points UHF radio signals travel primarily by line of sight and obstructions between the sending and receiving stations will affect system performance Signal propagation is also affected by attenuation from obstructions such as terrain foliage or buildings in the transmission path A Site Survey is recommended for most projects to determine the optimal RF paths for each link This is especially true when more than one RF coverage area is required A Site Survey will determine the best unit location for the Relay Points 2 5 SELECTING ANTENNA AND LIGHTNING ARRESTOR COMBINATIONS Very Important Before you deploy your system you must read and understand this section RF engineers and installers have seen many types of radio installations over the year
292. v A Page 145 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FOR MODELS 140 5018 60x 140 5048 40x and 140 5048 60x The Viper radio is tested to and conforms with the essential requirements for protection of health and the safety of the user and any other person and Electromagnetic Compatibility as included in following standards Standard Issue Date EN 60950 1 2006 with Amendment A11 2009 A1 2010 EN 301 489 1 2008 04 EN 301 489 5 2002 08 It is tested to conform with the essential radio test suites so that it effectively uses the frequency spectrum allocated to terrestrial space radio communication and orbital resources so as to avoid harmful interference as included in the following standards Standard Issue Date EN 300 113 1 2 2009 11 It therefore complies with the essential requirements and provisions of the Directive 1999 5 EC of the European Parliament and of the council of March 9 1999 on Radio equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity and with the provisions of Annex IV Conformity Assessment procedure referred to in article 10 This device is a data transceiver intended for commercial and industrial use in all EU and EFTA member states Language Declaration CalAmp t mto prohla uje e tento r dio je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF
293. v A Page 146 Language Declaration Hierbij verklaart CalAmp dat het toestel radio in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Hawnhekk CalAmp jiddikjara li dan tar radju jikkonforma mal htigijiet essenzjali uma provvedimenti ohrajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 1999 5 EC Alul rott CalAmp nyilatkozom hogy a r di megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak Niniejszym CalAmp oswiadcza ze radio jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostatymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC CalAmp declara que este radio esta conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Directiva 1999 5 CE CalAmp izjavlja da je ta radio v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolocili direktive 1999 5 ES CalAmp t mto vyhlasuje Ze radio sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice 1999 5 ES CalAmp vakuuttaa t ten ett radio tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen H rmed intygar CalAmp att denna radio st r verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG H r me l sir CalAmp yfir v a tvarp er i samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Nor Nonw
294. ver the RF interface Packets Sent Failure Number of packets moved from the RF transmit queue that failed to be sent over the RF interface Bytes Sent Failure Number of bytes moved from the RF transmit queue that failed to be sent over the RF interface Refresh Click Refresh to refresh the tab contents and update values displayed in the QoS Statistics table Clear Statistics Click Clear Statistics to clear the QoS Statistics table reset all values to zero and restart counting 4 4 LAN SETTINGS The LAN Settings page contains six tabs LAN Settings DHCP Broadcast Multicast VLAN and Ethernet PHY 4 4 1 LAN SETTINGS LAN Settings is the first left most tab in the LAN Settings page To navigate to this tab select LAN Settings from the main menu This tab allows you to set the LAN IP Address Netmask gateway and MTU for the Viper and specify the IP Address and Netmask of the maintenance server Figure 44 LAN Settings LAN Settings oadcast thernet LAN ua DHCP sntp Broadcast yy ayy Pedir i Settings Settings Multicast LAN Port 9 Enable Disable LAN IP Address i default 192 168 205 1 LAN Netmask Ji default 255 255 255 0 LAN MAC Address 00 04 99 80 0D 3C LAN Gateway LAN MTU default 1500 Maintenance IP Address default 1 1 1 1 Maintenance Netmask 44 2552552550 default 255 255 255 0 Cancel If you Save changes to any parameters marked db you wi
295. would restart the timeout timer Message example msg1 inactivity 60 msg2 inactivity 100 msg3 inactivity 30 These messages are then sent as follows msg1 is sent msg2 is sent msg3 and then a wait is done Since the last message was msg3 with inactivity timeout of 30 seconds the TCP connection would close after 30 seconds of msg3 Viper SC IP Router for Licensed Spectrum PN 001 5008 000 Rev A Page 189 Summary On TCP Connection Timeout Inactivity Setting Since the longest inactivity timeout per TCP connection with a remote unit PLC RTU is 120 seconds based on message inactivity for maximum of 120 seconds it is important that each remote PLC RTU is polled with the 120 second period to avoid extra traffic resulting from additional TCP IP open and close connection messages For systems where polling is done infrequently gt 120 seconds the additional TCP traffic needs to be considered for the system traffic plan For normal operation the inactivity timeout does not need to be specified in the Path setting Master and remotes should be set this way especially if remote PLCs send unsolicited messages or initiate communication with other remotes If a system has a mix of PLCs CompactLogix or ControlLogix with MicroLogix or SLC then also refer to information earlier in this appendix regarding the Allen Bradley Micrologix 1100 or 1400 may also apply to SLC 5 and Allen Bradley PLC for Viper System information which precedes it
296. y sets this parameter on its clients during key exchange Status Frequency Available on VPN servers only The number of seconds between server status advertisements sent to VPN clients An advertisement consists of a few packets sent at an interval determined by the Network Latency setting A server s status includes its VPN service state enabled or disabled and load 0 100 tunnel capacity in use A non zero value permits VPN clients to discover servers they do not need to be preconfigured with server IP addresses Clients that are aware of more than one server can intelligently select one based on its advertised load Notes This value does not affect the server statuses that are sent whenever a VPN server is enabled or disabled Server status packets are broadcast over radio links to minimize traffic Devices acting as radio relays must therefore explicitly enable station relay mode to forward server statuses A VPN server automatically sets this parameter on its clients during key exchange Default 10 seconds Minimum 5 seconds 0 disabled Maximum 60 seconds 1 minute Idle Timeout Available on VPN servers only The number of minutes with no traffic received from a VPN tunnel before attempting an Idle Probe and or Key Exchange When Idle Probes are disabled the Idle Timeout will simply trigger Key Exchange Notes This value affects the time it takes for VPN clients to re establish their tunnels after a VPN server is rest

Viper SC+™ Intelligent IP Router for Licensed Spectrum User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Viper SC+&trade; Intelligent IP Router for Licensed Spectrum User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Viper SC+™ Intelligent IP Router for Licensed Spectrum User Manual